JVC CONNECTED CAM GY HC500E User Manual

Shoe

Eyecup

For mounting separately sold lights and

accessories.

Prevents external light from entering the

viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.

Tally Lamp

Visibility Adjustment Lever

(A P76 [Monitoring Audio Sound During

[x] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)

Recording Using a Headphone] )

(A P47 [Tally Lamp and LED] )

(A P236 [Blinking of the Tally Lamp] )

Built-in Microphone

(A P100 [Audio Output during Playback] )

Monitor Speaker

Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)

[TC IN/OUT] switch

(A P81 [Synchronizing Time Code on

For operating the menu and cursor and for

confirming a setting, as well as for configuring

the settings for time code and user’s bit.

When a function is assigned to the cross-

shaped button, it functions as a user button.

Another Camera] )

[TC] TC Input/Output Terminal

(A P76 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )

[REC] Record Trigger Button

Starts/stops recording.

(A P33 [Attaching the Tripod (Sold

Memo :

Tripod Mounting Screw Hole

Separately)] )

[FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch

(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )

This switch is interlocked with the [REC/HOLD]

button W at the top of the handle.

[EXP.FOCUS/9] Expanded Focus Assist/User

9 Button

For switching the expanded focus ON or

OFF.

For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever

X at the handle.

(A P62 [Expanded Focus Function] )

Accessory Mounting Screw Hole

You can also use it as a user button by

assigning a specific feature in the menu

setting to this button.

Zoom Lever at the Grip

(A P59 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )

26 Names of Parts

Hood Release Button

(A P34 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )

External Microphone Cable Clamp

(A P33 [Attaching the External Microphone

(Sold Separately)] )

[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2

(XLR 3-pin x 2)

(A P33 [Attaching the External Microphone

(Sold Separately)] )

Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)

For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).

Caution :

Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength

to withstand the weight of this camera recorder.

If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the

camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.

Check the [INSTRUCTIONS] provided with the

shoulder belt before using.

[REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock

Switch

Starts/stops recording.

Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]

Trigger button.

Memo :

This switch is interlocked with the [REC] button

P on the grip.

[REC] button P on the grip is not locked.

Zoom Lever on Handle

(A P59 [Using the Zoom Lever at the

Handle] )

Names of Parts 27

Side Control Panel

[WHT BAL] White Balance Auto/Manual

Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection

Switch

b Z

(A P69 [Adjusting the White Balance] )

[y] One Push Auto White Balance Button

[SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual

Selection Button

(A P67 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )

[FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch

(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness] )

(A P69 [Automatic White Balance Mode

(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )

[MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button

This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety

zone, and center mark displays.

You can also use it as a user button by assigning

a specific feature in the menu setting to this

button.

H I J K

L M

[FOCUS AUTO/MANU] Focus Switch

(A P60 [Focus Operation] )

[ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch

Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the

appropriate range.

(A P54 [About the Operation Lock Feature

[KEYLOCK ON/OFF] Key Lock Switch

(KEYLOCK)] )

[MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button

(A P68 [Setting the ND Filter] )

OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64

[PUSH AUTO/PUSH LOCK] Focus Push Auto/

Push Lock Button

(A P60 [One Push Auto Focus] )

(A P60 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily

(Push Auto Focus)] )

EXT.SLOT Lamp

(A P60 [Locking the Focus] )

Lights up in green when a media is inserted into

EXT.SLOT, and lights up in red when the media

is being accessed.

[USER7] Button

It can be assigned with a specific menu function.

[POWER ON/OFF] Lock Power ON/OFF Switch

Turns ON/OFF the power.

Hold down the lock button (blue) in the center

to toggle ON/OFF.

[USER8] Button

It can be assigned with a specific menu function.

When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”

appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.

Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the

power again.

[IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button

[PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button

(A P38 [Turning On/Off the Power] )

POWER/CHARGE LED

(A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )

[GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/

M/H] Sensitivity Selection Switch

(A P66 [Setting the Gain] )

STATUS LED

(A P148 [ STATUS LED ] )

NETWORK LED

(A P148 [ NETWORK LED ] )

28 Names of Parts

[ZEBRA/5] Zebra/User 5 Button

(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )

You can also use it as a user button by assigning

a specific feature in the menu setting to this

button.

[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button

For switching the focus assist function ON or

OFF.

(A P61 [Focus Assist Function] )

You can also use it as a user button by assigning

a specific feature in the menu setting to this

button.

[MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button

[AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button

When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,

their respective values and the value of white

balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button

is pressed.

Displays the menu screen during Camera

mode.

Switches between [Main Menu] and

[Favorites Menu] when the [MENU/THUMB]

button is pressed and held down while the

menu screen is displayed.

You can also use it as a user button by assigning

a specific feature in the menu setting to this

button.

Displays the menu screen when the button is

pressed during thumbnail display in the

Media mode.

Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)

The function changes according to the

operation status of the camera recorder.

Stops playback and displays the thumbnail

screen when the button is pressed during

playback screen display in the Media mode.

During menu operation (all modes)

(A P208 [Starting Distribution] )

Set Button (R)

Confirms menu items

and setting values

[CANCEL] Cancel Button

Cancels various settings and stops playback.

Cross-shaped Button : Selects menu items

(JK)

and setting values

During Camera mode

Shutter operation:

Set Button (R)

Shutter ON/OFF

Cross-shaped Button : Switches shutter

(JK)

speed when shutter

is ON

Cross-Shaped Button : AE level operation

(HI)

[ONLINE/3] Online/User 3 Button

Switches live streaming between ON/OFF.

You can also use it as a user button by

assigning a specific feature in the menu

setting to this button. Initial setting: Live

streaming

[OIS/2] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button

For switching the image stabilizer feature mode

ON or OFF.

You can also use it as a user button by assigning

a specific feature in the menu setting to this

button.

(A P51 [Inserting the SSD Media Adapter] )

Names of Parts 29

Rear Terminal

Card Slot B

[EXT.SLOT]

SSD media adapters (sold separately) such as

KA-MC100 can be inserted into the slot.

Battery

(A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )

[DC] Terminal

Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For

connecting with the supplied AC adapter.

(A P36 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )

OPEN

BATTERY

BATTERIE:

7.2V

[SDI OUT] Terminal

(A P175 [Connecting External Monitor] )

[REMOTE] Terminal

(A P176 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )

SD Card Cover

Card Slot A

[SLOT SEL] Button

[LAN] Terminal

For connecting the LAN cable.

[HOST] USB Host Terminal

For switching the active card slot during

For connecting a USB adapter according to the

intended purpose when you are connecting the

unit to a network.

shooting and playback.

[BATT.RELEASE] Button

(A P35 [Removing the Battery] )

(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network

Connection] )

[HDMI] Terminal

(A P175 [Connecting External Monitor] )

[AUX] Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)

For connecting to receiver such as wireless

microphone.

Access Lamp A/B

30 Names of Parts

LCD Monitor

[INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection

Switch

K J I

[CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch

Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.

CH1

CH2

INPUT1

INPUT2

MONITOR

INT

INPUT1

INPUT2

LINE

MIC

CH1

BOTH

CH2

MIC

+48V

LCD BRIGHT PEAKING

DISPLAY STATUS

AUTO

MANUAL

[CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch

CH1

CH2

(A P75 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )

[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio

Recording Mode Switch

C D E F

LCD Monitor

Lens Section

[CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level

Adjustment Knob

(A P44 [Adjusting the Brightness] )

20x

OPTICAL ZOOM

FOCUS

[LCD BRIGHT +/-] LCD Display Brightness

Adjustment Button

ND FILTER

AUTO

MANU

1/64

1/16

1/4

PUSH AUTO

PUSH LOCK

OFF

[PEAKING +/-] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment

Button

USER7 USER8

(A P44 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )

(A P45 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )

B C

D E

[DISPLAY] Display Button

Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the

display screen during normal screen display

(when the menu screen is not displayed).

Filter Built-In Screw

Transparent or UV filter for lens protection, or

filters for various effects can be installed.

Installable filter types: Φ82 mm

(A P41 [Display Screen] )

Switches between [Main Menu] and

[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY] button

is pressed while the menu screen is

displayed.

Memo :

Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.

(A P34 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )

(A P33 [Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )

Lens Cover Open/Close Switch

[STATUS] Status Screen Display Button

Press the [STATUS] button to display the status

screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor

during normal screen display (when the menu

screen is not displayed).

Focus Ring

(A P60 [Focus Operation] )

Zoom Ring

(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )

(A P42 [Status Screen] )

Iris Ring

[MONITOR]/[+/-] Audio Monitor Selection

Switch/Volume Adjustment Button

Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the

monitor speaker/headphone.

(A P76 [Monitoring Audio Sound During

To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on

the side control panel.

Recording Using a Headphone] )

(a mark appears on the screen)

Names of Parts 31

Basic System Diagram

Shoulder

Belt

Wireless

Microphone

Receiver

GY-HC550/GY-HC500

Headphone

Microphone

[INPUT1]/

[INPUT2]

Monitor

[x]

[AUX]

[TC]

SDI Cable

GY-HC550/GY-HC500

Wireless LAN Antenna

[SDI OUT]

[HDMI]

BNC

HDMI Cable

USB Network Adapter

Battery

[HOST]

(BN-VC296G)

Battery Charger

(AA-VC2)

[DC]

SSD Media Adapter

[EXT.SLOT]

(KA-MC100)

AC Adapter

Standard Package

Tripod

[REMOTE]

SD Card

SD Card Reader

Carrying

Case

Remote Control Unit

32 Basic System Diagram

Opening/Closing the Lens Cover

Settings and Adjustments

Before Use

Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or

close the lens cover.

Before shooting, open the lens cover.

When this camera recorder is not in use, close the

lens cover to protect the lens.

Adjusting the Grip Belt

Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt

accordingly.

Lens cover switch

Caution :

Do not press against the lens cover with force.

Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.

Caution :

If the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall

off resulting in injuries or malfunction.

Attaching the Tripod (Sold Separately)

Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera

Attaching the External Microphone

(Sold Separately)

recorder.

(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)

You can attach a separately sold microphone to the

Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.

To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,

which may result in injuries or damages, read the

“INSTRUCTIONS” of the tripod to be used and

make sure that it is securely attached.

microphone holder.

1, 3

o Bottom

Turn the knob on the microphone holder

counterclockwise to loosen and open the

microphone holder.

Place the microphone in the microphone

Caution :

holder.

If the camera recorder exceeds the weight limit

of the tripod, do not mount it on the tripod.

Use the tripod on a stable surface.

To prevent the camera recorder from falling,

attach securely using the rotation prevention

hole.

Turn the knob on the microphone holder

clockwise to secure the microphone.

Connect the microphone cable to the

[INPUT1] or [INPUT2] terminal.

Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.

Perform the settings for the microphone

Use screws with screw length 5 mm and below.

correctly.

(A P35 [Using a Battery Pack] )

Settings and Adjustments Before Use 33

Attaching the Wireless LAN Antennas

Attaching/Detaching the Hood

Attaching the Hood

Align the markings on the camera recorder and

hood; turn the hood in the direction of the arrow until

it is locked.

(Supplied) A

Attach the wireless LAN antenna by turning it in the

clockwise direction. Hold the base while attaching

the antenna.

Detaching the Hood

While pressing the hood release button, turn the

hood in the direction of the arrow (anti-clockwise)

to remove it.

Caution :

Applying force to the wireless LAN antenna or

yanking it may damage the antenna so please

use caution when using the antenna.

If it is damaged, replacement is chargeable even

during the warranty period.

(Part number: T9A-0095-00)

Use the antenna holders without removing

them.

Caution :

Remove the hood when attaching a filter,

teleconverter or wide converter to the front of the

lens.

34 Settings and Adjustments Before Use

Memo :

Power Supply

Blinking of the [POWER/CHARGE] lamp during

charging indicates the charge level.

[POWER/CHARGE] Lamp

during “POWER.OFF”

To use this camera recorder, you can attach a

battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.

Charge Level

(A P36 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )

Alternates between a blinking Less than 25 %

orange light (4 times) and

Caution :

light off (1 second)

Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”

before changing the power supply that operates

this camera recorder.

Alternates between a blinking Less than 50 %

orange light (3 times) and

light off (1 second)

To charge the battery using a battery charger,

purchase a genuine charger that can charge the

recommended battery.

Alternates between a blinking Less than 75 %

orange light (2 times) and

light off (1 second)

Alternates between a blinking Less than 100 %

orange light (blinks once) and

light off (1 second)

Using a Battery Pack

Charging the Battery

Light goes out

Fully charged

You can charge the battery even when operating

the camera recorder using the AC adapter. The

lamp lights up in green during “POWER.ON”.

Charge the battery immediately after purchase or

when the battery power is running low.

The battery is not charged when purchased.

Removing the Battery

POWER/

CHARGE

OFF

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “OFF”.

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “OFF”.

While pressing and holding the [BATT.

RELEASE] button, push up and remove the

battery in the direction of the arrow.

Attach the supplied battery.

Slide it in until you hear a click.

Connect the supplied AC adapter to the

[DC] terminal.

Open the cover of the[DC] terminal and connect

as shown in the diagram.

Caution :

Do not remove the battery when the [POWER

ON/OFF] switch is “ON”.

Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.

The [POWER/CHARGE] lamp blinks during

charging and will go out after charging is

complete.

Leaving the camera recorder unused with the battery

attached will deplete the battery power even when

you set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”.

Remove the AC adapter after charging is

complete.

Remove the battery if you are not using the camera

recorder.

Power Supply 35

Estimated Charging and Continuous

Operating Times

Using AC Power (DC IN Power)

Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera

Charging time

recorder with AC power.

BN-VC296G (accessory) Approx. 5 hours

When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “OFF”

Memo :

If you charge the battery immediately after using

while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully

charged.

It is recommended that you charge the battery

in an environment between 10 °C and 30 °C (50

°F and 86 °F). The battery may not be fully

charged or the charging time may be prolonged

if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/

50 °F). In addition, charging the battery under

high temperature (above 30 °C/86 °F) condition

may shorten the battery life.

POWER/

CHARGE

Continuous operating time

OFF

BN-VC296G (accessory) Approx. 2 hrs 40 mins

(*1)

Approx. 2 hrs 50 mins

(*2)

Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to

the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.

*1 When [System] is set to “4K” and all other

Check that the power switch of the camera

recorder is set to “OFF”.

settings are in factory default

*2 When [System] is set to “HD” and all other

settings are in factory default

Memo :

Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and

connect as shown in the diagram.

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “ON”.

Actual operating times may differ depending on

the age of the battery, charging condition, and

operating environment.

Operating time is shortened in cold

environment.

Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.

Caution :

The operating time may shorten when power

zoom is used, accessories are connected, or

when the LCD monitor is frequently used.

For purchase of spare batteries and battery

charger, please contact the local dealers in your

area.

Do not insert or remove the DC cable during

recording.

Do not use power supply of high voltage

fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or

with insufficient capacity.

Precautions for Batteries

Charging the Built-In Battery

Store the battery in a cool and dry place when

not in use. Do not expose the battery to high

temperatures (such as in a car under direct

sunlight). Failure to do so not only shortens the

battery life but also damages the battery.

If the operating time shortens drastically even

after charging, the battery may be reaching the

end of its life. Replace the battery with a new

one.

The date/time and time code data are stored

using the built-in rechargeable battery.

When power is connected to the camera

recorder, the built-in battery always gets

charged. When the power is disconnected, the

battery gradually discharges.

The battery will be totally discharged if left

unused for 3 months and the date/time and time

code data will be reset. When this happens, set

the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON” to display

the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the date/

time.

(A P39 [Initial Settings] )

36 Power Supply

Menu Screen

(A P108 [Display and Description of the Menu

Screen] )

Power Status Display

Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor

The power status is displayed on the display and

menu screens.

Display Settings

Display

Description

B 7.4V

B 100min

C 30%

4 RES

Currently powered by a battery.

When the battery power runs out,

the battery mark appears hollow,

and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.

Memo :

You can set the display using

[LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B

[Battery].

Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone

(A P128 [ Battery ] )

Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and

warning tone.

Acquisition of battery information

may fail if a genuine battery is not

used.

The tally lamp blinks.

The warning tone is output from the monitor

speaker or [x] terminal.

Memo :

Appears when an error occurs

during battery charging.

You can specify whether to turn on the warning

tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set] B

[Audio Set] B [Alarm Level].

Currently powered by an AC

adapter.

Camera recorder battery charging

(A P134 [ Alarm Level ] )

in progress.

In the event that the battery level runs low while

it is being used, the camera recorder will stop

operating automatically.

(A P128 [Details on charging

condition] )

(A P128 [ Battery ] )

Caution :

Memo :

The remaining battery power and time are

displayed as they are from the battery

If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold

separately) is not used, the battery mark which

indicates the battery level may not appear.

information. Accuratedatamaynotbedisplayed

depending on the battery condition. Replace the

battery as soon as possible when the remaining

battery power and time are low.

Display Screen

(A P159 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )

(A P165 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )

282min

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Power Status Display 37

Turning Off the Power

Turning On/Off the Power

Turning On the Power

Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby or

stop mode.

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “OFF”.

Remove the battery and the power to the [DC]

terminal (when not in use for a long time).

Caution :

Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “OFF”

during recording. Check that the operation mode

display is “STBY” or “STOP” before you turn off the

power.

If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/OFF]

switch to “OFF” during recording, wait for 5

seconds or more before you turn on the power

again.

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “ON”.

When turning off the power, first set the [POWER

ON/OFF] switch of the camera recorder to “OFF”.

Do not remove the battery or turn off the AC power

while the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to “ON”.

The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode

and is ready for shooting.

Memo :

The camera recorder always start up in Camera

mode when the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is set to

“ON”. Use the [MODE] button at the side of the

camera recorder to switch mode.

The camera recorder behaves as follows when an

AC adapter is connected.

If the battery is not fully charged, the battery will

be charged at the same time.

Even when a fully charged battery is used,

charge the battery briefly to confirm the

remaining battery power.

(A P35 [Power Supply] )

38 Turning On/Off the Power

Initial Settings

Memo :

The menus and messages on the screen of the

LCD monitor or viewfinder are displayed in the

selected language.

When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting

screen for performing the initial settings in the

camera recorder appears.

Set the date/time of the built-in clock in the [Date/

Time] screen.

Select a language using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

A self-diagnosis screen appears.

All operations are disabled until initial settings are

complete.

Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and

press the Set button (R).

Self-diagnosis starts.

A progress bar appears, and “Complete

Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is

complete.

Memo :

It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the

power supply.

Be sure to close the lens cover.

Hold down the lock button (blue) at the

center of the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to set

to “ON”.

A language selection screen appears.

For U models

Memo :

It takes about 6 minutes to complete the

diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate

or turn off the camera recorder.

For E models

Language

English

Français

Deutsch

Italiano

Español

Pусский

Initial Settings 39

Changing the Time after Initial Setting

Press the Set button (R) after confirming

the exit screen.

Setting the Date/Time

(A P148 [ Date/Time ] )

The [Date/Time] screen appears.

For U models

Select [System] B [Date/Time].

The [Date/Time] screen appears.

Set the date and time.

Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button

(HI) and select the setting item.

Change the values with the cross-shaped

button (JK).

Press the Set button (R) after setting is

complete.

For E models

The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/

time.

Changing the Display Style

You can change the display style of the date/time

on the menu.

Setting the Date Display (Date Style)

The date display can be changed in [System] B

[Date Style].

Set the time zone and date/time.

Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button

(HI) and select the setting item.

Setting the Time Display (Time Style)

Change the values with the cross-shaped

(A P165 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )

The time display can be changed in [System] B

[Time Style].

button (JK).

Press the Set button (R) after setting is

complete.

The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/

time.

Date/Time Display in Each Operation

Mode

Memo :

During Camera mode:

The configured date/time data can be displayed

on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen and

be recorded to a recording media.

Time of the built-in clock is displayed.

During Media mode:

Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is

displayed.

The value of the year can be set in the range of

“2000” to “2099”.

The configured date/time data is saved in the

built-in battery even if the power is turned off.

40 Initial Settings

Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode

Displays on the LCD

Monitor and Viewfinder

This is the screen display during clip playback in

Media Mode.

The display switches with every press of the

[DISPLAY] button.

You can display the camera status, recording

media information, zebra pattern, and various

markers in the video image on the LCD monitor and

viewfinder screen during shooting.

(Display off B Display on B Display off)

Memo :

When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B

[Character] is set to “On”, the display screen and

menu screen are also displayed in the video

image of the video signal output terminal.

(A P130 [ Character ] )

Display Off

Display Screen

1000/2000

282min

3840x2160

30p 140M

00:00:00.00

Jan 24,2019

12 :34 :56

Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Camera Mode

(A P159 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )

The display switches with every press of the

[DISPLAY] button.

4030 20 10

(Display off B Display on B Display off)

Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the

status screen.

Display On

(A P167 [Status Screen] )

Display Off

282min

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

5600

ISO

102400

F2. 8

Display On

Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder 41

Status Screen

Remote Edit Mode Screen

This screen allows you to check the current

This is a mode for accessing the page for editing

the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a web

browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet

terminal, or PC.

settings.

To display the status screen, press the

[STATUS] button in the normal screen.

Press the [STATUS] button again to return to the

normal screen.

(A P188 [ Clip Metadata ] )

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button at each status

screen (other than the [Camera] screen) to enter

the setting screen.

Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to switch

between the screens.

Remote Edit Mode

USER Switch Set

Exit

Warning Display

Warning display is displayed in the display screen

(Camera mode, Media mode).

(A P231 [Error Messages and Actions] )

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

Camera

12 :34 :56

LCD/VF

Record Format

Audio

Video

Planning Metadata

Network

Connection Setup

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Warning Display Area

Streaming

These are screen examples. The contents

displayed are different depending on the model

and settings.

42 Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder

Adjusting the LCD Monitor

and Viewfinder

You can monitor video images on this camera

recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or

both.

LCD BRIGHT PEAKING

Tilt 90 degrees downward

Normal LCD

Inverted

DISPLAY

LCD

Tilt 180 degrees

upward

Open the LCD cover.

Incline the LCD monitor to a position that

Displays on the LCD Monitor and

Viewfinder Screen (VF)

enables easy viewing.

Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.

While the LCD monitor is open, you can

rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees

downward.

LCD Monitor Status

LCD closed Normal LCD OFF

Inverted LCD ON

LCD opened Normal LCD ON

Inverted LCD ON

LCD Display VF Display

OFF

Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees

upward enables you to see the screen from

the lens side. To display the image when it is

viewed from the opposite direction (mirror

image), perform setting as follows.

Set [LCD/VF] B [LCD Mirror] to “Mirror” B Set

button (R)

Memo :

Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds

to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.

The function to switch between LCD monitor and

viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]

button can be canceled by opening/closing or

rotating the LCD monitor.

(A P125 [ LCD Mirror ] )

Adjust the brightness, contour, and

contrast of the LCD monitor.

You can change the angle and brightness of the

LCD monitor according to your usage condition.

Changing the brightness of the screen will not

affect the recorded images.

Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder 43

Adjusting the Viewfinder

Adjusting the Brightness

You can change the brightness and peaking of the

viewfinder screen according to your usage

conditions.

Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/-] button to adjust the

brightness of the LCD monitor.

The [+] button brightens the monitor and the

[-] button darkens it.

Changing the brightness of the screen will not

affect the recorded images.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously

to return to standard settings.

During adjustment, the brightness level is

displayed on the LCD monitor.

ꢅꢄꢁ

PEAKING

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Adjusting the Contour

Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the

contour of the LCD monitor.

(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also

be adjusted.)

The [+] button increases contour correction

and the [-] button decreases contour

correction.

Caution :

A high-definition viewfinder is used on this

camera recorder in order to provide an accurate

focusing environment. Due to the characteristic

of the display device, colors may appear on the

images when you blink your eyes. This is not a

malfunction. It does not affect the recorded

images, SDI output, or HDMI output.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

return to standard settings.

During adjustment, the contour level is

displayed on the LCD monitor.

ꢅꢁ

Incline the viewfinder vertically to a

position that enables easy viewing.

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Turn the visibility adjustment lever to

adjust the visibility.

Adjusting the Contrast

Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen

the image on the viewfinder screen.

Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the

contrast of the LCD monitor.

Adjust the brightness, contour, and

contrast of the viewfinder screen.

Adjust using [LCD/VF] B [LCD Contrast].

(A P125 [ LCD Contrast ] )

Increasing the value increases the contrast.

[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value: 0)

44 Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder

Adjusting the Brightness

Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the

brightness of the viewfinder screen.

Adjust using [LCD/VF]B[VF Bright].

(A P125 [ VF Bright ] )

Increasing the value increases the

brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to -10]

(Default value: 0)

Adjusting the Contour

Use the [PEAKING +/-] button to adjust the

contour of the viewfinder screen.

The contour of the LCD monitor will also be

adjusted.

(A P44 [Adjusting the Contour] )

Memo :

When [LCD/VF] B [LCD + VF] is set to “Off”,

operate after switching to the viewfinder display

by pressing the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds

or longer.

Adjusting the Contrast

Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the

contrast of the viewfinder screen.

Adjust using [LCD/VF] B [VF Contrast].

(A P125 [ VF Contrast ] )

Increasing the value increases the contrast.

[Setting Values: +10 to -10] (Default value: 0)

Displaying in Black and White

You can display the viewfinder screen in black

and white.

[LCD/VF] B [VF Color] item B Press Set

button (R) B “Off” Select B Press Set button

(R).

(A P125 [ VF Color ] )

Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder 45

Assignment of Functions

to User Buttons

EXP.FOCUS/9

FOCUS ASSIST/1

OIS/2

ONLINE/3

You can assign functions to the following buttons

and use them as user buttons.

By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability

of the camera recorder can be enhanced.

Perform settings in the menu items corresponding

to each button.

AE LOCK/4

ZEBRA/5

MARKER/6

Button

Menu Item

USER7 USER8

[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button USER1

[OIS/2] Button

USER2

USER3

USER4

USER5

USER6

USER7

USER8

USER9

[ONLINE/3] Button

[AE LOCK/4] Button

[ZEBRA/5] Button

[MARKER/6] Button

[USER7] Button

Assign functions to the buttons from the

menu.

Configure each item to the user buttons in

[Camera Function] B [User Switch Set].

[USER8] Button

[EXP.FOCUS/9] Button

Memo :

Operations of the user buttons are interlocked

with the menu settings.

Front Cross-Shaped Button USER10 ▲

When the menu screen is displayed, these

buttons function as the menu operation buttons.

(A P148 [ NETWORK LED ] )

([J])

Front Cross-Shaped Button USER11 ▼

([K])

Front Cross-Shaped Button USER12 ◀

([H])

Front Cross-Shaped Button USER13 ▶

([I])

46 Assignment of Functions to User Buttons

Tally Lamp Behavior

Tally Lamp and LED

[Tally Lamp] Setting

This is the indicator lamp for recording, warning

and network.

Rec/Live

Live

Rec

External Off

Streaming

The operation changes according to the menu

settings.

Warning

Alarm

Recording

Camera

Recorder

Status

Set using [System] B [Tally Lamp]/[NETWORK

LED]/[STATUS LED].

During live

(A P147 [ Tally Lamp ] )

(A P148 [ STATUS LED ] )

streaming

Input from

Remote

PROGRAM

PREVIEW

Control Unit

Tally lamp

NETWORK LED Behavior

[NETWORK LED] Setting

Off

(Green)

(Red)

Activating

Warning

During live streaming

Waiting for live streaming

(Orange)

connection

(Orange)

Error during live streaming

NETWORK LED

STATUS LED

STATUS LED Behavior

[STATUS LED] Setting

REC/

Return

over IP

External

Off

Pre Rec

(Green)

Activating

Warning

(Red)

(Green)

(Red)

On Pre Rec standby

Recording

Remaining space in media

(Orange)

running low

(Only during recording)

(Red)

PROGRAM

Input from

Remote

PREVIEW

Control Unit

(Green)

(Orange)

Return over IP in Progress

Error during Return over IP

J :

Lights up

Flashes rapidly

Blinks slowly

Tally Lamp and LED 47

Usable SSD Media

Refer to the “Instruction Manual” of the SSD Media

Adapter that is inserted into [EXT.SLOT] for steps

to mount the SSD media.

Recording Media

This camera recorder saves recorded audio sound

and videos except those in “4K EXT (SSD)” quality

to the SD card (sold separately) in the card slot.

Audio sound and videos in “4K EXT (SSD)” will be

recorded to the SSD media (sold separately) in the

KA-MC100 SSD Media Adapter (sold separately)

that is inserted into the [EXT.SLOT].

Caution :

Please refer to the product information page on

our website for a list of SSD media that have

been tested for compatibility.

Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards

Usable Cards

The estimated recordable time is only a guide.

Differences may occur depending on the SD card

in use and the battery condition.

Format Setting and Usable SD Card

Combinations

The recordable time varies according to the

settings in [System], [WFormat], [WResolution],

[WBit Rate] and [YResolution].

Usable SD

System

Format

Bit Rate

Card

High-

(A P150 [W Resolution/ G Resolution] )

(A P151 [W Bit Rate/ G Bit Rate] )

(A P152 [ Y Resolution ] )

Speed

70M (XHQ),

50M (XHQ),

35M (UHQ)

UHS-I U3 or

higher

System

Format

Resolution

QuickTime (H.264)

3840x2160

150M,

150M

70M

QuickTime

(H.264)

Bit Rate

150M

70M

150M

8 GB

16 GB

UHS-I U1 or

higher, or Class

10 or higher

70M (XHQ),

32 GB

100

199

399

100

200

401

64 GB*

128 GB*

256 GB*

512 GB*

106

212

424

848

50M (XHQ),

50M (XHQ)

35M (UHQ)

QuickTime

(MPEG2),

35M (HQ), 25M

SDXC

(Unit: minute)

MXF (MPEG2) (SP)

UHS-I U1 or

higher, or Class

6 or higher

SD,

Exchange

12M (LP),

HD,

HD+Web

(Web)

(U model)

8M (LP)

System

Format

HD+Web (HD)

+Web

MP4

12M (LP),

8M (LP)

(Web)

(H.264)

(E model)

QuickTime (H.264)

720x

Web

UHS-I U1 or

higher, or Class

4 or higher

1920x

1080

1920x1080,

480,

720x

576

960x

540

480x

270

Resolution

1280x720

Caution :

XHQ

Using cards other than those from Panasonic,

TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording

failure or data loss.

Bit Rate

UHQ

(70M) (50M)

8 GB

16 GB

32 GB

64 GB*

128 GB*

256 GB*

512 GB*

105

210

420

839

147

295

590

1180

103

207

415

832

1664

194

391

785

1572

3147

274

556

1119

2243

4495

588

1190

2396

4804

9626

8998 19270

6297 18004 38557

SDXC

(Unit: minute)

48 Recording Media

Estimated Recordable Time of SSD

Media

System

Format

QuickTime

(MPEG2)

Exchange,

The estimated recordable time is only a guide.

Differences may occur depending on the SSD

media in use and condition of the battery.

MXF

MP4 (H.264)

(MPEG2)

The recordable time varies according to the

settings in [System], [GFrame Rate], and

[GBit Rate].

1920x1080,

Resolution

1440x1080, 1440x1080 1920x1080

1280x720

Bit Rate

8 GB

16 GB

103

206

412

825

1651

141

283

566

1133

2267

LP (12M)

139

279

580

1121

2245

4482

LP (8M)

197

396

794

1592

3186

6376

System

Format

Resolution

Frame Rate

Bit Rate

500 GB

1 TB

4K EXT (SSD)

ProRes

3840x2160

32 GB

60p

422

101

201

30p

50p

422

121

241

25p

64 GB*

128 GB*

256 GB*

512 GB*

422HQ

422LT 422HQ

422LT

173

346

144

289

161

2 TB

134

Frame Rate

Bit Rate

500 GB

1TB

SDXC

(Unit: minute)

422HQ 422

422LT 422HQ 422

422LT

172

345

Memo :

134

268

100

201

402

24p

144

288

576

161

321

120

240

481

If the SD card contains files recorded by devices

other than this camera recorder or files that are

saved from a PC, the recordable time may be

shorter or data may not be properly recorded.

For each file format, up to 600 clips can be

recorded to one SD card on this camera

2TB

690

Frame Rate

Bit Rate

500 GB

1 TB

422HQ 422

422LT

180

359

167

335

125

251

502

recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one

card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min

regardless of the estimated recordable time,

and no further recording can be performed.

When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,

the remaining time display for recording to the

SD card will run out faster than usual.

2 TB

719

(Unit: minute)

Memo :

The maximum continuous recording time of “4K

EXT (SSD)” is 4 hours. Recording stops upon

exceeding 4 hours.

Write-Protect Switch on the SD Card

Slide the write-protect switch upward to enable

writing or deleting.

Slide the write-protect switch downward to

prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card

are protected.)

Write-Protect Switch

Write/Delete Enabled

Write/Delete Disabled

Recording Media 49

Inserting an SD Card

Removing the SD Card

This camera recorder comes with two card slots

(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and

playback.

Check that the SD card to be removed is not

being accessed (status indicator of the

card slot lights up in red).

Open the SD card cover.

Push the SD card and remove it from the

slot.

Close the SD card cover.

Memo :

When both slots are inserted with usable SD

cards, the previously selected slot is used.

Caution :

Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the

camera recorder or remove the SD card when it

is being accessed. All data recorded on the

card, including the file that is being accessed,

may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the

status indicator is lit in green or turned off before

you turn off the power or remove the SD card.

If you mistakenly remove the card when it is

being accessed, reinsert the card only after the

status indicator goes off.

Open the SD card cover.

Insert an SD card into the slot with the

notched corner of the card on the right.

The status indicator of the card slot to which the

card was inserted lights up in red.

Close the SD card cover.

The SD card may not be recognized if you insert

and remove the card within a short time. When

this happens, remove the card and wait for a few

seconds before you reinsert.

Card Slot Status Indicator

The following table shows the respective states of

slot A and B.

Lamp

Lights up in

Slot Status

The inserted SD card is being

accessed. (writing/reading data)

Do not turn off the power of the

camera recorder or remove the SD

card.

red

Lights up in

green

On standby. The inserted SD card

can be used for recording or

playback.

Light goes out

SD card is not inserted.

An unusable card is inserted.

An SD card is inserted but a

different slot is selected.

50 Recording Media

Switching the SD cards

Formatting (Initializing) of Recording

Media

When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,

you can use the [SLOT SEL] button to switch the

card to use.

When any of the following recording media (SD

card or SSD media) is inserted, [!FORMAT]

appears in the remaining level display area.

Format the card using the camera recorder menu.

When the memory on an SD card is full during

recording, datarecordingautomaticallyswitchesto

the other card.

Unformatted recording media

Recording media formatted under different

specifications

Memo :

The [SLOT SEL] button is disabled during

recording or playback. Cards will not be

switched even if you press the button.

For details of the menu operation, refer to

“[Basic Operations in Menu Screen]

(A P 107)”.

Inserting the SSD Media Adapter

This camera recorder comes with an [EXT.SLOT]

for recording and playing audio sound and videos

in “4K EXT (SSD)” quality.

Caution :

Be sure to format the recording media on this

camera recorder. Recording media formatted

on a PC or other peripheral equipment cannot

be used on this camera recorder.

[!RESTORE] appears in the remaining level

display area when a recording media that

requires repair is inserted.

Select [System] B [Media] B [Format

Media].

(A P147 [ Format Media ] )

Select the slot of the card to be formatted

and press the Set button (R).

Turn off the camera recorder.

Detaching the Battery

Open the EXT.SLOT cover.

With the USB terminal of the SSD Media

Adapter facing down, insert it into

[EXT.SLOT].

The status of the selected recording media

is displayed.

Insert it all the way until the tab locks into place.

Select [Format] and press the Set button

Close the EXT.SLOT cover.

Attach the battery.

Turn on the camera recorder.

(R).

Format Media

Format

Cancel

Set

Recording Media 51

Formatting starts.

Select the recording media to be restored

and press the Set button (R).

Formatting...

Formatting is complete.

When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears

and the camera recorder returns to the [Format

Media] screen.

Restoring starts.

Memo :

The menu cannot be operated while formatting

is in progress, but recording is possible to the

slot where formatting is not executed.

Formatting cannot be performed in the following

cases.

Restoring...

When recording to the recording media to be

formatted is in progress.

SD card is not inserted.

Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z

Restoring is complete.

is displayed).

When restoring is complete, “Complete”

appears and the camera recorder returns to the

[Restore Media] screen.

Caution :

If you format a recording media, all data

recorded to it, including video data and setup

files, will be deleted.

When no media that requires restoring is

inserted, the camera recorder returns to the

[Media] menu screen.

Repairing the Recording Media

It is necessary to restore the recording media if an

abnormality occurs to the data in the recording

media due to some reasons.

Caution :

[Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera

mode. However, it cannot be selected while the

camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore

Media] in Camera mode when the camera

recorder is not recording.

Memo :

[!RESTORE] appears in the remaining level

display area when a recording media that

requires repair is inserted.

[Restore Media] does not restore the SD card to

its original states completely. If restoring fails,

replace or format the recording media. Take

note that formatting erases all the information

inside the SD card.

Select [System] B [Media] B [Restore

Media].

(A P147 [ Restore Media ] )

Restoring cannot be performed in the following

cases.

Camera recorder is recording in progress.

SD card is not inserted.

Write-protect switch of the SD card is set (z

is displayed).

52 Recording Media

Example: QuickTime

Clips Recorded to Recording Media

Folders Created in the Recording Media

ABCG0001

Clip Number

The captured image is recorded into different

folders according to the [Format] settings.

A number in automatic

ascending order is assigned in

the recording order.

Other than MXF (MPEG2): [DCIM]

MXF (MPEG2): [PRIVATE]A

Memo :

The Clip Number can be reset in

the menu.*

By formatting (initializing) the recording media

from the [Format Media] menu on the camera

recorder, folders required for recording in the

current [System] settings will be generated.

When the [System] settings and [WFormat]/

[YFormat] settings are changed, folders

required for recording in those settings will be

automatically generated.

Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)

This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3

digits of the serial number) by default.

[Clip Set] B [Reset Clip Number]

(A P154 [ Reset Clip Number ] )

Memo :

Before recording starts, you can set any

characters for the clip name prefix by using

[System] B [Record Set] B [Clip Set] B [Clip

Name Prefix].

(A P154 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )

Changes cannot be made after recording.

Caution :

When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted

using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),

recording to the recording media may fail if

formatting (initializing) of the media is not

performed.

Recorded Clips

Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name

The recorded materials may be split into several

files but they can be played back continuously

on the camera recorder.

When recording is stopped, the images, audio

and accompanying data which are recorded

from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on

the recording media.

Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards

in card slots A and B depending on the recording

time of the clip.

An 8-character clip name is automatically

generated for the recorded clip.

Caution :

(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)

A clip recorded across several SD cards cannot

be played back continuously. Continuous

playback is only possible when the recording is

made on one card.

Recording Media 53

Operation lock does not apply to the following

buttons and switches.

About the Operation Lock

Feature (KEYLOCK)

[POWER ON/OFF] switch

[ND FILTER] switch

[TC IN/OUT] switch

Focus Ring

You can use this feature to prevent erroneous

camera operation.

Zoom Ring

Iris Ring

Zoom Lever at the Grip

Zoom Lever on Handle

[FIX/VAR/OFF] switch

Memo :

Operation lock does not apply to the REC button

if “Keylock Except Rec” is selected in [Camera

Function] B [KEYLOCK].

(A P113 [ KEYLOCK ] )

Set the [KEYLOCK] switch to “ON”.

The operation lock turns on, and an operation

lock icon (r) appears on the display

screen.

The operation lock function is turned off when

the [KEYLOCK] switch is set to “OFF”.

Memo :

The operation lock feature is only valid in the

Camera mode.

(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness] )

The following remote operations are possible

even when the operation lock feature is turned

on (“On”).

Remote operation from the wired remote

control connected to the [REMOTE] terminal.

Remote operation of the camera through

access via a browser on devices such as a

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

54 About the Operation Lock Feature (KEYLOCK)

Shooting

Basic Shooting

Procedures

Configure the video and audio input

settings.

You have to configure video settings such as

brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and

white balance adjustment in order to start

shooting. You also have to adjust the audio

input settings and audio recording level for

audio recording.

Setting up

Adjusting the Brightness

Adjusting the White Balance

(A P69 [Adjusting the White Balance] )

Adjusting Audio Input Settings and

Recording Level

(A P59 [Zoom Operation] )

Press the [REC] button to start recording to

the recording media

The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.

Zoom Operation

Adjusting the Focus

(A P60 [Focus Operation] )

Memo :

Supply battery or AC adapter power to the

camera recorder.

If both SD card slots A and B are loaded with

recordable SD cards in the factory default state,

pressing the [REC] button starts recording only

to the media in the selected slot.

(A P35 [Power Supply] )

Insert the recording media

(A P48 [Recording Media] )

Configuring [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot

Mode] to “Dual” enables recording to be

performed simultaneously to the SD cards in

both slots A and B.

Turn on the power of the camera recorder.

Setting the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”

starts up the camera recorder in the Camera

mode to enable shooting.

(A P88 [Dual Rec] )

The tally lamp can be turned off in [System] B

[Tally Lamp].

Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and

viewfinder.

(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos

Check the most recently captured images.

Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],

[Frame Rate] and [Bit Rate] in [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format].

Press the user button that is assigned with

the Clip Review function. Doing so activates

the function and plays back the most recently

captured images on the LCD monitor and

viewfinder screen.

You can select the definition of the recorded

videos, file format for recording/playback,

and the video recording format on this

camera recorder.

After playback, the camera recorder returns

to standby mode (STBY).

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to display

the menu screen on the LCD monitor and

viewfinder.

Immediately (Clip Review)] )

Basic Shooting Procedures 55

You can select a definition for the recorded images

from the following items under [System].

Selecting System

Definition, File Format and

Video Format

You can select the definition of the recorded

videos, file format for recording/playback, and the

video recording format on this camera recorder.

4K EXT (SSD):

Performs 4K EXT recording in EXT.SLOT.

4K:

Records in 4K quality for both slots A and B.

HD:

Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.

SD:

Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.

HD+Web:

Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality

for slot B.

Setting the Record Format Menu

Set [System], [Format], [Resolution],

[Frame Rate] and [Bit Rate] in [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format].

(A P87 [Recording Simultaneously at Two

Different Definitions] )

High-Speed:

Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.

Set each of the items.

[Selecting a System Definition] (A P 56)

[Selecting a File Format] (A P 56)

[Selecting a Video Format] (A P 57)

Selecting a File Format

Select a file format in [WFormat]/[YFormat].

The following file formats are available for

selection.

[Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos]

QuickTime (MPEG2):

(A P 58)

QuickTime file format (.MOV)

MXF (MPEG2):

After setting is complete for all items, press

the [[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

MXF file format

The recording format is switched.

QuickTime (H.264):

A “Please Wait...” message appears on the

screen during switching.

QuickTime file format (.MOV)

Exchange: (U model only)

Sports Video Interop Group format (.MP4)

MP4 (H.264): (E model only)

MP4 file format

Selecting a System Definition

The following definitions are available for selection.

Memo :

4K EXT:

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, this

item is fixed at “ProRes”.

Records in 4K resolution (3840x2160)

4K:

Exchange (U model) and MP4 (E model) are

selectable only when [System] is configured to

“HD”.

Records in 4K resolution (3840x2160)

HD:

Records in HD (High Definition) resolution

(1920x1080, 1440x1080 or 1280x720)

SD:

When Exchange (U model) or MP4 (E model) is

selected, backup recording and clip cutter

function cannot be used.

Records in SD (Standard Definition) resolution

(720x480 or 720x576)

Web:

Records in resolution (960x540, 720x480,

720x576, or 480x270) suitable for web

distribution

High-Speed:

Records in HD resolution (1920×1080)

56 Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format

When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, the

options for slot A are:

Selecting a Video Format

The selectable [Frame Rate]/[Bit Rate] changes

according to the settings of [System]/[Format]/

[Resolution].

Record Format

Format

Frame

Bit Rate

Resolution

Rate

QuickTime 1920x1080 60i, 50i,

35M (HQ)

List of Formats

(MPEG2),

MXF

30p, 25p

1440x1080 60i, 50i

The following is a list of file formats and video

formats that can be selected on this camera

recorder.

35M (HQ),

25M (SP)

35M (HQ)

(MPEG2)

1280x720

60p, 50p

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”

QuickTime 1920x1080 60p, 50p

Record Format

(H.264)

70M (XHQ),

Format

Frame

Bit Rate

Resolution

Rate

50M (XHQ),

50M (XHQ)

ProRes

3840x2160 60p, 50p,

422HQ,

422,

30p, 25p,

24p

60i, 50i,

30p, 25p,

24p

422LT

50M (XHQ),

35M (UHQ)

Memo :

[Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.

[Slot Mode] is fixed at “----”.

1280x720

60p, 50p

The following functions cannot be used when 4K

EXT (SSD) is selected.

50M (XHQ),

35M (UHQ)

12M (LP)

8M (LP)

12M (LP)

8M (LP)

View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP or

Overlay Function

Exchange

(U model)

1920x1080 60p

1280x720

1920x1080 50p

1280x720

When [System] is set to “4K”

Record Format

MP4

(H.264)

(E model)

Format

Resolution

Frame

Bit Rate

Rate

3840x2160 30p,

Memo :

QuickTime

(H.264)

When [System] is set to “HD”, each item for slot

B is fixed at the same setting as slot A.

When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, [Format] is

fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.

25p,

24p

150M,

150M, 70M

Memo :

When [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange” or

“MP4(H.264)”, selection is possible only when

[System] is configured to “HD”.

The following functions cannot be used when 4K

is selected.

View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP or

Overlay Function

The following functions cannot be used when

HD+Web is selected.

Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting

as slot A.

View Remote, Live Streaming or Return over IP

Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format 57

When [System] is set to “High-Speed”

Record Format

When [System] is set to “SD”

Record Format

Format

Frame

Bit Rate

Format

Frame

Bit Rate

Resolution

Rate

Resolution

Rate

QuickTime 1920x1080 120/60p,

QuickTime 720x480

60i

8M (HQ)

(H.264)

100/50p

(H.264)

(U model)

70M (XHQ),

720x576

Memo :

50i

(E model)

50M (XHQ),

50M (XHQ)

The following function cannot be used when SD

120/30p,

100/25p,

120/24p

is selected.

50M (XHQ),

35M (UHQ)

Overlay Function

Each item for slot B is fixed at the same setting

as slot A.

Memo :

When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, the options

for slot B are:

[Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.

[Slot Mode] is fixed at “Series”.

The following functions cannot be used when

High-Speed is selected.

Record Format

Format

Frame

Bit Rate

View Remote, Live Streaming, Return over IP,

Upload of recorded clip, time stamp recording,

Face Detection or Overlay Function

The settings for slot B are fixed at the same as

slot A.

Resolution

Rate

QuickTime 960x540

30p, 25p, 24p 3M (HQ)

(H.264)

720x480

720x576

480x270

60i

50i

8M (HQ)

Only “Rec Run” and “Regen” are the only TC

generator settings available.

30p, 25p, 24p 1.2M (LP)

Memo :

It is not possible to set a shutter speed that is

slower than the frame rate.

The following functions cannot be used when

HD+Web is selected.

The angle of view shifts to telephoto.

(35 mm conversion: [Normal] 28.0 mm to 560.0

mm B [High-Speed] 56.1 mm to 1122 mm)

The sensitivity of high speed shooting is lower

than normal shooting. In order to capture more

beautiful images, it is recommended to perform

shooting in a lighted environment.

View Remote, Live Streaming or Return over IP

Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos

For setting the aspect ratio of the SD recording

image when [System] is set to “SD”.

You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.

The remaining space on the media (recordable

time to the recording media) runs out faster than

usual.

(A P152 [ SD Aspect ] )

Memo :

(Example: For 120/60p, as the recording speed

is twice as fast as usual, the remaining space on

the media is reduced by approximately double

the speed.)

For conditions other than those above, this item

is fixed at “16:9”.

58 Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video Format

Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section

Zoom Operation

Adjusts the angle of view.

You can adjust the preferred angle of view by

turning the zoom ring.

Optical zoom ratio: 1x to 20x

Dynamic zoom ratio: 1x to 40x

Setusing[CameraFunction] B [Zoom] B [Dynamic

Zoom].

Saving/Recalling Current Zoom

Position (Preset Zoom)

This allows you to register up to three zoom

(A P113 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )

Zooming can be operated using the following.

positions.

Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset

Zoom2”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any

of the user buttons.

Zoom Lever at the Grip

Zoom Lever on Handle

Zoom Ring at the Lens Section

During the zoom operation, the zoom bar or

number will appear on the upper right corner of the

screen.

(A P116 [USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲,

USER11 ▼, USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶] )

(A P162 [Zoom Display] )

Caution :

Save the current zoom position.

Depending on the zoom speed, the zoom drive

Press any of the user buttons assigned with

the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or

“Preset Zoom3” function for more than 1

second.

noise of the power zoom may be recorded.

Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip

Press the zoom lever to zoom.

The current zoom position will be stored.

Recall the stored zoom position.

The zoom speed changes according to the

extent the zoom lever is being pushed.

Zooms into wide angle and increases the

angle of view when “W” is pressed.

Press any of the user buttons assigned with

the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or

“Preset Zoom3” function and release within 1

second.

Zooms into telephoto and decreases the

angle of view when “T” is pressed.

The camera recorder zooms to the stored

zoom position.

Memo :

Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle

Set the speed for shifting to the preset zoom

position and the rate of change for starting and

stopping the preset zoom operation in [Camera

Function] B [Zoom] B [Preset Zoom] B [Speed]/

[Ease In]/[Ease Out].

Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch

to “FIX” or “VAR”.

Memo :

Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to

move at the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].

(A P114 [ Preset Zoom ] )

Operating other zoom maneuvers during a

zoom position recall will cancel the recall.

Set the zoom speed using [Camera

Function] B [Zoom] B [Handle Zoom Speed].

(A P113 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )

Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.

Memo :

When the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is

set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle

section cannot be used.

Zoom Operation 59

Locking the Focus

Focus Operation

While in the Auto Focus mode, pressing the [PUSH

LOCK] button locks the focus on the corresponding

point.

Adjusting Focus Automatically

icon appears when the focus is locked.

Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU] switch to

“AUTO”.

The auto focus icon e appears on the screen.

Memo :

Performing any focusing operation when the

focus is locked disengages the focus lock.

Memo :

When [Camera Function] B [Focus] B [AF

Assist] is configured to “Direction”, it is possible

to move the auto focus point by turning the focus

ring.

Adjusting Focus Manually

Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU] switch to

“MANU”.

(A P114 [ AF Assist ] )

The manual focus icon d appears on the

The AF area can be configured in [Camera

Function] B [Focus] B [AF Area]. Selecting

“Multi” displays a “Multi” icon, while selecting

“Wide” shows a “Wide” icon.

screen.

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

(A P114 [ AF Area ] )

One Push Auto Focus

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the

[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the

camera recorder focus on the center of the frame

automatically.

Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

Memo :

Using the Focus Assist or Expanded Focus

Memo :

function makes it easier to focus.

Face detection does not work during One Push

(A P61 [Focus Assist Function] )

Auto Focus.

(A P62 [Expanded Focus Function] )

Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button in the Manual

Focus mode activates the One-push Auto Focus

mode, while holding down the [PUSH AUTO]

button activates the Push Auto Focus mode.

(A P60 [One Push Auto Focus] )

AF Assist does not function.

When the operation is complete, the camera

recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode

automatically.

One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis

on the focusing speed. This function is not

suitable during recording.

(A P60 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily

(Push Auto Focus)] )

Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily

(Push Auto Focus)

The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus

mode temporarily and automatically adjusts

focus when the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed

during shooting in Manual Focus mode.

Release the [PUSH AUTO] button to return to

Manual Focus mode.

Memo :

Face detection does not work during Push Auto

Focus.

60 Focus Operation

AF Assist Function

Focus Assist Function

Configure this function to move the auto focus point

closer to or away from the camera or to activate MF

temporarily by turning the focus ring.

When the [F.ASSIST/1] button is pressed during

shooting, the focused area is displayed in color.

This enables easy and accurate focusing.

Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.

Set [Camera Function] B [Focus] B [AF Assist].

Direction:

Memo :

This option allows you to shift the auto focus

point to near and far directions by turning the

focus ring during AF.

When [LCD/VF] B [Shooting Assist] B [Focus

Assist] B [Type] is set to “ACCU-Focus”, the

depth of field becomes shallower to enable

easier focusing.

Focus is automatically adjusted to a focus

point near the position where the focus ring

stops turning.

(A P126 [ Focus Assist ] )

The “ACCU-Focus” function switches

automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.

Select the display color in [LCD/VF] B [Shooting

Assist] B [Focus Assist]B[Color].

Manual:

Temporarily activates MF when the focus ring

is turned during AF. The camera recorder

returns to the AF mode when the focus ring is

not operated for a some time.

(A P126 [ Color ] )

If you use the zebra function and the Focus

Assist function at the same time, it may be

difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In

this case, turn off the zebra function.

MF Assist Function

This function activates AF operation for a short

interval when the focus ring is turned during MF.

Set [Camera Function] B [Focus] B [MF Assist].

Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button

Youcanassignthe“FocusAssist”functiontoauser

button.

On:

Turning the focus ring during MF activates AF

for a short interval after the operation, after

which the camera recorder returns to the MF

mode.

Focus Assist + Function

You can operate the Focus Assist and

Expanded Focus functions simultaneously by

pressing the user button assigned with “Focus

Assist +”.

Memo :

“Expanded Focus” is displayed during the

“Focus Assist +” operation regardless of the

setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch

Set] B [Expanded Focus].

Focus Operation 61

Expanded Focus Function

You can magnify the preferred area by pressing the

[EXP.FOCUS/9] button; doing so enables precise

focus to be established easily.

Adjusting the Focusing by

Face Detection

This function detects human faces and

automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.

It can also track moving objects.

You can also use the user button assigned with

the “Expanded Focus” function instead of the

[EXP.FOCUS/9] button.

When several faces are detected, you can select

one to focus on.

(A P116 [USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲,

Memo :

USER11 ▼, USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶] )

This function can also adjust the brightness

automatically according to the brightness of the

face detected.

Press the [EXP.FOCUS/9] button.

(A P115 [Face Detection Function Settings] )

The center area of the screen is enlarged for

the first time.

For subsequent operation of the button, the

area at which the operation was last

performed will be enlarged.

Use the cross-shaped button (JKH I) to

magnify the preferred area.

The portion that is being magnified is

displayed at the lower right corner of the

screen.

Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the

setting.

Memo :

The display of the enlarged screen is dot by dot

equivalent.

To set the operation when the button is pressed,

go to [Camera Function] B [User Switch Set] B

[Expanded Focus].

(A P117 [ Expanded Focus ] )

Pressing and holding the Set button (R) resets

the position of magnification.

This function can be used together with the

Focus Assist function.

Magnifying an image does not alter the size of

the recorded image.

The cross-shaped button cannot be used as

user button while the area is being magnified.

This function is unavailable when [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is

set to “SD”.

When the display screen is turned off, the

magnified area at the bottom right of the screen

will not be displayed.

62 Focus Operation

Selecting Specific Person from Several

Persons

Assign the “Face Detection” function to any

of the user buttons.

(A P64 [Adjusting the Brightness

Hold down the user button that is assigned

with “Face Detection”.

Focus the camera recorder on a person and

press the user button that is assigned with

“Face Detection”.

The camera recorder will enter face selection

mode and the face detection icon (q) will

blink.

An orange frame will appear on the face of

the person nearest to the center of the

screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces

of others.

When Face detection is enabled, the face

detection icon (q) appears.

An orange frame will appear on the face of

the person nearest to the center of the

screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces

of others.

Detection Frame (Orange)

Focus will be automatically adjusted for the

selected person.

Memo :

When the button assigned with “Face Only AF”

or the [Camera Function] B [Face Detection] B

[Face Only AF] item is configured to “On”,

“ONLY” appears to the right of the face detection

icon, and auto focus functions only when a face

is detected. When a face cannot be detected,

the camera recorder switches manual focusing.

Blinking

Detection Frame (Blue)

Select a specific person.

Use the cross-shaped button (HIJK) to

select a person.

Detection Frame (Orange)

An orange frame will appear on the face of

the selected person and focus will be

automatically adjusted.

Detection Frame (Orange)

Memo :

If the detection frame does not appear, make

sure that Auto Focus mode is selected. Also, if

[Face Detection] is set to “AF&AE”, set at least

one of the iris, gain, and electronic shutter

control items to the automatic adjustment mode.

Automatically: Automatic Brightness Adjustment

(AE) Mode] )

Detection Frame (Blue)

Press the Set button (R) to confirm the

person for face detection.

Memo :

Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the

selection.

(A P65 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)

Mode] )

A face can be selected by turning the focus ring

without entering the face selection mode.

The detection sensitivity and duration for

maintaining the current focus after losing sight

of the face can be configured in [Camera

Function] B [Face Detection] B [Sensitivity]/

[Holding Duration].

(A P66 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic

Gain Adjustment)] )

(A P67 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic

Shutter Adjustment)] )

(A P115 [ Sensitivity ] )

(A P115 [ Holding Duration ] )

Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection 63

Memo :

Adjusting the Brightness

Setting the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter

the Full Auto mode also activates the automatic

brightness adjustment (AE) mode. In this case,

white balance is also switched forcibly to auto

mode.

Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter

speed and ND filter according to the brightness of

the object.

The convergence speed of the automatic

adjustment for automatic brightness adjustment

(AE) can be set in the menu.

Adjusting the Brightness Automatically:

Automatic Brightness Adjustment (AE)

Mode

(A P111 [ AE Speed ] )

If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and

Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the value

of the corresponding items when the user button

that is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be

fixed.

Iris, Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are

automatically adjusted according to the brightness

of the object to maintain optimum brightness.

To set only the Iris, Gain and Shutter to Auto mode,

set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF” before setting

each item to the automatic adjustment mode.

(A P117 [ AE Lock ] )

If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and

Shutter) have been set to Auto mode, the

automatic brightness adjustment (AE) mode is

enabled.

Set Gain, Iris and Shutter to Auto mode.

[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 65)

[Setting the Gain] (A P 66)

[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 67)

Set the target level (brighter/darker) to

maintain optimum brightness during

automatic adjustment.

Adjusting the Brightness Manually

When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,

some or all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter) can

be manually adjusted.

This can be configured using the cross-

shaped button (HI) on the side of the camera

recorder unit.

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Adjust the Iris, Gain and Shutter speed.

This can be configured in [Camera

Function] B [AE Level].

[Adjusting the Iris] (A P 65)

[Setting the Gain] (A P 66)

00:00:00.00

[Setting the Electronic Shutter] (A P 67)

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

Memo :

The brightness cannot be manually adjusted in

the Full Auto mode.

If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually

adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily

disabled.

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

64 Adjusting the Brightness

Adjusting the Iris

Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the

iris manually.

Adjust the aperture of the lens iris according to the

The open F-number of the aperture varies

according to the zoom position.

brightness of the subject.

Wide [W] end

Tele [T] end

F2.8

F4.5

Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode

F-number

Decrease

Description

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

The subject appears brighter.

The focused range becomes

sharper, while the background is

blurred to produce a soft image.

The subject appears darker.

Background of image becomes

focused as well.

Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto Iris

mode.

The iris is automatically adjusted according to

the brightness of the object.

Increase

Memo :

A a icon appears on the left side of the lens

aperture value (F-number) during Auto Iris

mode.

Memo :

Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button in the Manual

Iris mode activates the One-push Auto Iris

mode, while holding down the [PUSH AUTO]

button activates the Push Auto Iris mode.

Setting the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter

Full Auto mode also activates the Auto Iris

mode. In this case, the Gain, Shutter and White

Balance also enter into Auto mode forcibly.

The iris open/close limit can be set in [Camera

Function] B [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)][Auto Iris

Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto Iris.

One Push Auto Iris

When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,

press the [PUSH AUTO] button to adjust the iris

according to the brightness of the object.

(A P112 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )

(A P112 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )

The control target level (brighter/darker) of the

auto iris can be configured using the cross-

shaped button (HI) on the side of the camera

recorder unit or in [Camera Function] B [AE

Level].

Push Auto Iris

When the camera recorder is in the Manual Iris

mode, press and hold the [PUSH AUTO] button to

change to the Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris

will be automatically adjusted according to the

brightness of the subject.

The convergence speed of the auto iris can be

set in the menu.

(A P111 [ AE Speed ] )

While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE/FAW

About the Iris F-number

Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a

icon

Blurry effects due to “small aperture diffraction”

may occur when the diameter of the iris becomes

too small. When this phenomenon occurs, the F-

number on the screen turns gray to warn you that

the diffraction F-number of the iris has been

exceeded.

appears on the left side of the lens aperture

value (F-number) during lock operation.

Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode

The aperture value (F-number) of the lens can be

You are recommended to make appropriate use of

ND filters to prevent the F-number from turning

gray.

set manually.

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Manual

Iris mode.

The lens aperture value (F-number) is

displayed.

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Adjusting the Iris 65

Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain

Switching)

Setting the Gain

This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity

when there is insufficient illumination on the object.

You can set the gain of the video amplifier

according to the brightness of the object. Select the

setting mode according to your shooting

conditions.

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [GAIN] button to set to the manual

gain mode, followed by selecting the [GAIN

L/M/H] switch

Use the [GAIN L/M/H] switch to display the

gain of the selected video amplifier.

The gain level appears on the screen.

The a icon on the screen disappears.

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

The default positions of the switch are as

follows.

Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain

Adjustment)

[L]

[M] : 6dB

[H] 12dB

0 dB

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [GAIN] button to set to the AGC

mode.

Memo :

The gain of the video amplifier is automatically

set according to the brightness of the subject.

A a icon appears on the left side of the gain

value in the AGC mode.

You can change the gain value of each position

in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes

the screen to appear grainier.

(A P112 [GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H] )

Memo :

Setting the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter

the Full Auto mode also activates the Auto Gain

mode. In this case, the Iris, Shutter and White

Balance also enter into Auto mode forcibly.

The switching operation of the [GAIN L/M/H]

switch is disabled in the Full Auto mode.

The upper limit of the gain setting value during

AGC operation can be set in [Camera

Function] B [AGC Limit].

(A P111 [ AGC Limit ] )

While in the Auto Gain mode, and [AE Lock] is

set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a

icon appears on

the left side of the gain value during lock

operation.

66 Setting the Gain

Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter

Switching)

Setting the Electronic

Shutter

You can change the shutter speed (time for each

shooting frame) using the electronic shutter

function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted

manually or automatically.

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the

Manual Shutter mode.

The a icon on the screen disappears.

Use the Set button (R) to switch between the

shutter modes and the cross-shaped button

(JK) to switch between the speeds.

Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic

Shutter Adjustment)

00:00:00.00

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the

Automatic Shutter mode.

The a icon appears on the screen.

Automatic Shutter mode adjusts the shutter

speed automatically according to the

brightness of the object.

ND1

/ 60

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Set the controllable range for the Automatic

Shutter in [Camera Function] B [EEI Limit].

(A P112 [ EEI Limit ] )

Switching Shutter Mode

Press the Set button (R) to turn ON/OFF the

shutter.

Memo :

Setting the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter

the Full Auto mode also activates the Automatic

Shutter mode. In this case, the Iris, Gain and

White Balance also enter into Auto mode

forcibly.

When the shutter is ON, configure the [Camera

Function]B[Shutter] item to “Step” or “Variable”.

“Step” is the factory default.

(A P111 [ Shutter ] )

In the Automatic Shutter mode, switching of

shutter speed with the cross-shaped button (J

K) at the side of the camera recorder and

switching of shutter mode with the Set button (R)

are disabled.

Switching Shutter Speed

When the shutter is ON, use the cross-shaped

button (JK) to configure the shutter speed. The

settable shutter speed range differs according to

the video format setting.

While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and

[AE/FAW Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a

Memo :

icon appears on the left side of the shutter speed

during lock operation.

To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [WFrame

Rate] to “25p” or “24p” and set [LCD/VF] B

[Display Type] B [Shutter] to “DEG”.

(A P111 [ Shutter ] )

Setting the Electronic Shutter 67

After the shutter speed indication turns white, the

setting value can be changed using the cross-

shaped button (JK).

Setting the ND Filter

For “Step”

Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the

appropriate range.

Frame Rate

Shutter

Speed

60p,

60i,

30p

50p,

50i,

25p

120/60p,

120/30p,

120/24p

100/50p,

100/25p

24p

1/10000

1/4000

1/2000

1/1000

1/500

1/250

1/120

1/100

1/60

Switch according to the brightness of the object.

When the position on the switch is changed, the

selected position of the ND filter is displayed on the

LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

1/50

1/48

1/30

1/25

00:00:00.00

1/24

5 . 6 f t

1/15

12 :34 :56

1/12.5

1/12

ND 1/16

1/7.5

1/6.25

1/6

/ 60

ND1/16

F2. 8

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

5600

ISO

102400

Memo :

When the shutter is set to OFF

For “Variable”

It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the

lens aperture to less than F11.

Frame Rate

60p,

60i,

30p

1/9860

1/60.00

1/30.00

50p,

50i,

25p

ND Filter Warning Display

Shutter Speed

24p

In order to adjust the amount of light when you are

shooting at a relatively bright location, the diameter

of the iris may become extremely small, causing

blurry effects to occur as a result.

Upper limit

(Default value)

Lower limit

1/10118

1/50.00

1/25.00

1/9860

1/48.00

1/24.00

This phenomenon is known as “small aperture

diffraction”. You can make appropriate use of ND

filters to prevent it from occurring.

Frame Rate

120/60p,

Shutter Speed

100/50p,

100/25p

120/30p,

120/24p

This unit displays an ND filter warning when

necessary to prompt you to select an appropriate

ND filter.

Upper limit

(Default value)

Lower limit

Memo :

1/9860

1/120.0

1/10118

1/100.0

Set [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [ND

Filter] to “Normal + Assist”.

(A P129 [ ND Filter ] )

When the iris diameter becomes too small

while adjusting the light intensity, or when

an ND filter is used in a dimly-lit location,

the ND filter display starts blinking.

The operations of the cross-shaped button

(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the

following cases.

During clip preview

During display of the formatting confirmation

screen

When selecting a face using face detection

When selecting a photometry area with [Spot

Meter] set to “Manual”

During expanded focus

68 Setting the Electronic Shutter

Memo :

Adjusting the White

Balance

Setting the [FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter

the Full Auto mode also activates the Automatic

White Balance mode. In this case, the Iris, Gain

and Shutter also enter into Auto mode forcibly.

When [Camera Function] B [User Switch Set] B

[AE Lock] is set to “AE/FAW” or “FAW”, the white

balance when the user button that is assigned

with [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed while in

the Automatic White Balance mode.

Adjust the white balance according to the color

temperature of the lighting. You can select the

adjustment mode according to the shooting

conditions.

As the color of the light (color temperature) varies

according to the light source, it is necessary to

readjust the white balance when the main light

source illuminating the subject changes.

(A P117 [ AE Lock ] )

If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,

pressing the assigned user button will display

the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.

FAW Paint Adjustment

You can fine-adjust the white balance that was

automatically adjusted.

GAIN

WHT BAL

SHUTTER

Select [Camera Process] B [White

Balance] B [FAW Paint] and press the Set

button (R).

PRESET

The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.

White Balance

Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:

Fulltime Auto White balance)

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to

Automatic White Balance mode.

FAW Paint

“FAW” appears on the screen.

White balance switching with the [WHT BAL

B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.

Adjust the R and B values.

Caution :

Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R

value and (HI) to adjust B value.

The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of [AWB]

(Auto White Balance).

When the power of the camera recorder is

turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes

about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.

Adjusting the White Balance 69

Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative

Temp.] Values

Press the Set button (R).

Returns to the [White Balance] screen.

You can change both the color temperature

settings in the Preset mode in the menu.

White Balance

Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative

Temp.] menu.

Select [Camera Process] B [White Balance]

B [Preset Temp.] and [Alternative Temp.],

and press the Set button (R).

R Value

FAW Paint

The Color Temperature setting screen

appears.

B Value

Manual White Balance Mode (Manual

Switching)

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to

Manual White Balance mode.

Color Temperature

Detailed Selection

Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection

switch to select “PRESET” (preset mode), “A”

(memory A mode), or “B” (memory B mode).

Color Temperature Selection Screen

Screen

Memo :

Select the color temperature.

This is fixed at “FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]

switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.

The FAW (Full Time Auto White Balance) mode

makes automatic adjustments by sampling the

color temperature of the video to obtain the most

appropriate white balance level.

When selecting from a setting value (Color

Temperature Selection screen), use the

cross-shaped button (JK) to select the color

temperature.

[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,

5200K, 4800K, 4200K, 3200K, 3000K,

2800K]

To select detailed values (Color

Temperature Detailed Selection screen)

Preset Mode (PRESET)

Press the cross-shaped button (I) to

Two different color temperature settings are

registered on this camera recorder. You can

switch between them using the [y] button or

the user button assigned with the “AWB”

function.

display the Color Temperature Detailed

Selection screen.

Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to

select a color temperature.

[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in

100K increments)]

Default setting:

[Preset Temp.]

3200K

Memo :

[Alternative Temp.] : 5600K

Use the cross-shaped button (I) to switch

between the Color Temperature Selection

screen and the Color Temperature Detailed

Selection screen.

Set the [WHT BAL] switch to “PRESET”.

Press the [y] button or the user button

assigned with the “AWB” function

If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,

pressing the assigned user button will display

the Color Temperature Selection screen.

(A P68 [Setting the ND Filter] )

The color temperature switches.

(“Preset Temp.”1“Alternative Temp.”)

70 Adjusting the White Balance

Preset Paint Adjustment

The white balance for [Preset Temp.] and

[Alternative Temp.] can be fine adjusted

individually or collectively.

Locate a place with similar lighting conditions

as the object to be shot, place a white object

near the center of the screen and zoom in to

fill the screen with white.

Press the [

] button or the user button

Select [Camera Process] B [White

Balance] B [Preset Paint Memory].

assigned with the “AWB” function

The white detection frame appears when Auto

White Balance is activated. Fill the frame with

white completely.

“Common” configures the settings for the

entire color temperature range collectively.

“Individual” configures the settings for the 9

types of color temperature individually.

WhileAutoWhiteBalanceisstartingup, “A

”

or “B

” appears on the screen. (

mark

appears blinking)

Select [Camera Process] B [White

Balance] B [Preset Paint].

After the correct white balance is obtained, an

estimated value of the current color

temperature is displayed.

The adjustment screen appears if “Common”

is selected.

The lower color temperature limit of the color

temperature range is displayed if “Individual”

is selected. Select the color temperature to

adjust.

120/60fps

1080 /30p

282min

00:00:00.00

100min

50min

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

White Detection

Frame

In the case of 2300K for example, the target

range is 2300K to 2900K (less than 3000K)

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Adjust the R and B values.

Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust

[AWB] Activating

R value and (HI) to adjust B value.

Blinking

Press the Set button (R).

120/60fps

1080 /30p

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

In the case of “Common”, the display returns

to the [White Balance] screen.

As for “Individual”, repeat steps 1 to 4 as

necessary to configure each color

temperature individually.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode

(B)

Result Display

Caution :

Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or

Do not use highly reflective objects, such as

metals. Doing so may result in improper white

balance adjustment.

Memory B.

When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection

switch is set to “A” or “B”, pressing the [y]

button or the user button assigned with the

“AWB” function executes Auto White Balance.

White balance will be automatically adjusted

and the adjusted value will be saved in Memory

A or Memory B.

The Auto White Balance function cannot provide

optimum white balance with an object outside the

adjustment range, for example when it contains

only a single color or not enough white color.

Prepare the camera recorder.

Set the [POWER ON/OFF] switch to “ON”.

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.

Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the

lighting.

Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection

switch to “A” or “B”.

Adjusting the White Balance 71

Error Message

Press the Set button (R).

If the Auto White Balance adjustment is not

correctly completed, one of the following

messages will appear for about 3 seconds.

Returns to the [White Balance] screen.

White Balance

Message

Status

R Value

Auto White　* NG: Displayed when there is not

Object

enough white color on the

object, or when the color

temperature is not suitable.

Use another white object and

adjust the white balance

again.

AWB Paint

(*A or B)

B Value

Auto White * Error: Displayed when the lighting is

Low Light

(*A or B)

dark. Increase the lighting

and adjust the white balance

again.

Memo :

Executing Auto White Balance will usually clear

the White Paint Adjustment value. But when

[Camera Process] B [White Balance] B [Clear

Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not

be cleared even when Auto White Balance is

executed.

Auto White * Error: Excessive illumination.

Over Light

(*A or B)

Displayed when the lighting is

too bright. Decrease the

lighting and adjust the white

balance again.

(A P123 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )

If [White Balance] is assigned to the user button,

pressing the assigned user button will display

the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.

(A P118 [Camera Process Menu] )

White Paint Adjustment

You can fine-tune the white balance saved in

Memory A or Memory B.

Select [Camera Process] B [White

Balance] B [AWB Paint] and press the Set

button (R).

The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.

White Balance

AWB Paint

Adjust the R and B values.

Use the cross-shaped button (JK) to adjust R

value and (HI) to adjust B value.

72 Adjusting the White Balance

Adjusting the Camera

Image

Using the Image Stabilizer

Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.

Check whether the image stabilizer feature

is turned ON or OFF.

The picture quality of the camera can be set using

the [Camera Process] menu.

If the image stabilizer icon (i/j) does not

appear on the screen display, the image

stabilizer function is OFF.

As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you

can adjust the values while checking the picture

quality on the camera.

00:00:00.00

[Color Space]

[Gamma]

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

[Detail]

[Master Black]

[Black Toe]

[Knee]

[White Clip]

[White Balance]

[Color Matrix]

[Color Gain]

[Reverse Picture]

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the

image stabilizer feature (when image

stabilizer feature is OFF).

The image stabilizer feature switches between

ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2]

button.

Memo :

OFF:

For details of the respective items, see the

Use this setting when the camera recorder is

[Camera Process] menu.

secured, such as when using a tripod.

ON:

Reduces blurring of images due to camera

shake.

Memo :

Select [Camera Function] B [OIS] B [Level] to

set the correction level.

(A P111 [ Level ] )

Correction by this feature may not be sufficient

when camera shake is too strong.

“OIS” is assigned to the [OIS/2] button in factory

default.

“OIS” can also be assigned to other user

buttons.

(A P132 [ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )

About the Hard Lock Feature

Use this feature when blurry image caused by

camera shake tends to occur due to strong

acceleration.

It can be used to lock the IS (image stabilization)

lens in place.

Press the [OIS/2] button to turn off the

Image Stabilizer function

Set [Camera Function] B [OIS] B [Hard

Lock] to “On”.

(A P111 [ Hard Lock ] )

Memo :

Camera shake that causes image blur occurs

when switching between On and Off.

Adjusting the Camera Image 73

Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]

Audio Recording

Select the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]

terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode

switch.

You can record audio from the two channels (CH1/

CH2) in synchronization with video images on this

camera recorder.

Setting

[LINE]

Description

Select from the options below to record the audio.

Use this setting when connecting to

an audio device or other equipment.

The reference input level is +4 dBu.

Built-in Microphone

Microphone connected to [AUX] terminal

Microphone connected to [INPUT1] terminal

Microphone connected to [INPUT2] terminal

[MIC]

Use this setting when connecting to

a dynamic microphone.

[MIC+48V] Use this setting when connecting to

a microphone (phantom

microphone) that requires a +48 V

power supply.

Memo :

When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the

reference input level in [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]

B [Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2 Mic Ref.].

CH1

CH2

INPUT1

INPUT2

INT

INPUT1

INPUT2

LINE

MIC

+48V

LCD BRIGHT PEAKING

AUTO

MANUAL

(A P132 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )

CH1

CH2

Caution :

When connecting a device that does not require

a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not

set to the “MIC+48V” position.

Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each

Channel

Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.

When the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is

set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is

connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If

you increase the recording level when a

microphone is not connected, noise from the

input terminal may be recorded.

Switch Setting

INT

Connected Devices

CH1

0 Built-in Microphone

0 _[M_Ai_Ucr_Xo_]p_th_eo_rmne_inc_ao_lnnected to

INPUT1

INT

Microphone connected to

When a microphone is not connected to the

[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the [INPUT1]/

[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the

volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level

adjustment knob.

[INPUT1] terminal

CH2

0 Built-in Microphone

0 _[M_Ai_Ucr_Xo_]p_th_eo_rmne_inc_ao_lnnected to

INPUT1

INPUT2

Microphone connected to

[INPUT1] terminal

Microphone connected to

[INPUT2] terminal

Memo :

When “INT” is set, the built-in microphone is

disabled if a microphone is connected to the

[AUX] terminal; audio from the microphone

connected to the [AUX] is recorded.

When “INT” is selected, set the reference input

level in [Main Menu] B [A/V Set] B [Audio Set]

B [Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].

(A P132 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )

(A P132 [ AUX Gain ] )

74 Audio Recording

When the input channel is set to “INT” for

both [CH1] and [CH2]

Adjusting Audio Recording Level

You can select to adjust the audio recording levels

for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or

automatically.

Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection

switch to “MANUAL”.

Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment

knob to adjust the level.

CH1

CH2

INPUT1

INPUT2

INT

INPUT1

INPUT2

LINE

MIC

+48V

LCD BRIGHT PEAKING

When the built-in microphone and the [AUX]

input terminal are used, the recording levels of

[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.

AUTO

MANUAL

CH1

CH2

This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/

MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].

Memo :

Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],

or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the

recording audio.

Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual

Adjustment)

If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter

operates according to the value set.

(A P132 [ Limiter ] )

Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on

the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the

manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/

[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the

recording level.

For the reference level to be recorded to an SD

card, set [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Ref. Level]

to “-20dB”, “-18dB”, or “-12dB”. (common for

CH1/CH2)

You can adjust the level manually during the

recording, recording standby, and stop modes.

(A P132 [ Ref. Level ] )

The operations of the [CH2] recording level

adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]

selection switch are disabled.

When the input channel is set to “INPUT1”/

“INPUT2”

Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]

selection switch to “MANUAL” for the

channel to be adjusted manually.

Automatic Adjustment Mode

Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection

switch to “AUTO” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to

“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The

audio recording level is set automatically

according to the input level.

Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]

recording level adjustment knob to adjust

the level.

When [Audio Set] B [Limiter] is set to “Off”,

adjust such that the audio level meter does not

light up at -2 dB even for loud sounds.

(A P132 [ Limiter ] )

When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,

mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/

MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.

Memo :

00:00:00.00

When [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Limiter] is set

to “Off” while in the automatic adjustment mode,

the limiter operates at -6dBFS.

5 . 6 f

12 :34 :56

(A P132 [ Limiter ] )

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

When [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Audio On FULL

AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the

audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2

AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the

camera recorder even when the [FULL AUTO]

switch is set to “ON”.

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

4030 20 10

-2dB

(A P134 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )

Audio Recording 75

Monitoring Audio Sound

During Recording Using a

Headphone

Time Code and User’s Bit

Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the

video in this camera recorder.

The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the

viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or

recording. (Display screen)

You can check the recorded audio using

headphone.

Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit

The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the

viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or

recording.

The display differs according to the menu settings.

Set [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [TC/UB]

to “On”.

(A P129 [Display On/Off Item] )

MONITOR

CH1

BOTH

CH2

Set [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [TC/UB].

When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or

user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the

display screen.

Connect the headphone.

Select the channel to monitor with the

[MONITOR] selection switch.

(A P128 [ TC/UB ] )

Setting

[CH1]

[BOTH]

Description

Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].

Outputs the audio recorded in

AB CD EF 89

00H00M00S00

[CH1/CH2].

[CH2]

Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].

00:00:00.00

Use the [MONITOR +/-] button to adjust the

monitor volume.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

Memo :

Audio during recording is not output from the

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

monitor speaker.

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Warning tone is output when there is an

abnormality in the camera recorder or when the

battery is low.

(A P236 [Warning Tone] )

Selecting Audio Output Method When the

[MONITOR] Selection Switch Is Set to “BOTH”

When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,

perform the following setting to output stereo

sound.

Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to

“BOTH”.

Set [A/V Set] B [Audio Set] B [Monitor] to

“Stereo”.

(A P134 [ Monitor ] )

Memo :

You can set the volume of the warning tone in

[A/V Set]B[Audio Set]B[Alarm Level]. (“Off”/

“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)

(A P134 [ Alarm Level ] )

76 Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a Headphone

Time Code Operation Mode

Set the time code operation in [TC/UB] B [TC

Generator].

Setting Time Code

Generator

Presetting the Time Code

Setting

Description

Time code and user’s bit data generated from the

internal time code generator are recorded.

This section describes how to set [TC/UB] B [TC

Preset].

(A P124 [ TC Preset ] )

Memo :

Free

Time code information can be

synchronized with the date/time

information acquired from the

GPS.

Run(GPS)

Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another

camera recorder connected to the

[TC] terminal. The time code

operates in the run mode at all

times regardless of the recording

status.

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “50p”, “50i”,

“25p” or “24p”, setting for “Drop” will be disabled.

(A P79 [Setting Time Code without Opening

You can configure the setting without accessing

the [TC/UB] menu screen.

It continues to run even when the

power of the camera recorder is

turned off.

the Menu] )

Free Run

Rec Run

The time code operates in the run

mode at all times regardless of the

recording status.

Required Settings Before Preset

It continues to run even when the

power of the camera recorder is

turned off.

Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to “Rec

Run” or “Free Run”.

The time code operates in the run

(A P78 [Setting Time Code] )

mode during recording. It

[Rec Run]:

continues to run in the order of the

recorded clips as long as the SD

card is not replaced. If the SD card

is removed and recording is made

on another card, time code will be

recorded on the new card from

where it was left off in the previous

card.

Preset data in the time code generator

operates in run mode during recording mode.

Set this when recording continuous time

code in connecting frames.

[Free Run]:

Time code starts to operate in run mode from

the preset time in the time code generator.

Regen

The time code operates in the run

mode during recording. When the

SD card is replaced, the last time

code recorded on the card is read

and recorded on a new card so that

the time code continues in running

order.

Memo :

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode] is

set to “Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC

Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free

Run(Ext)”, “Rec Run” is activated.

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, and

[TC Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free

Run(Ext)”, “Rec Run” is activated.

Time Code and User’s Bit 77

Setting Time Code

Select the framing mode for the time code

generator (only when the frame rate setting

is “60” or “30”).

Select [TC/UB] B [TC Preset] and press the

Set button (R).

To configure the setting, go to [TC/UB] B [Drop

Frame].

(A P124 [ TC Preset ] )

The [TC Preset] screen appears.

(A P124 [ Drop Frame ] )

[Drop]:

TC/UB

Sets the run mode of the time code generator

to drop frame mode. Use this setting when

placing emphasis on the recording time.

[Non Drop]:

TC Preset

00:00:00:00

Sets the run mode of the time code generator

to non-drop frame mode. Use this setting

when placing emphasis on the number of

frames.

Memo :

When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to

“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as

“<Regen>” and cannot be selected.

Drop frame/non-drop frame mode

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [Frame Rate] is set to “60p”, “60i”, or

“30p”, the actual number of frames per second

is approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the

time code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or

“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number

discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops

the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except

for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in

the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame

are dropped.

Set the time code (hour, minute, second,

frame).

Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the

cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-

shaped button (JK) to change the values.

TC/UB

The non-drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not

drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with

the actual time.

Cursor

TC Preset

00:00:00:00

During non-drop

frame

During drop frame

Memo :

Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.

The cursor moves to the time digit (left).

Check the values and press the Set button

(R).

The time code is set and the screen returns

to [TC/UB].

To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]

button.

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.

Returns to the normal screen.

78 Setting Time Code Generator

Setting Time Code without Opening the

Check the values and press the Set button

(R).

The time code is set and the screen returns

to the normal screen.

FOCUS ASSIST/1

OIS / 2

To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]

button.

TIME CODE

Caution :

When the camera recorder is switched to Media

mode during editing, editing will be canceled

and the screen will close.

AE LEVEL

MENU/THUMB

CANCEL

When editing the time code, operation of the

buttons that are set in [Camera Function] B

[User Switch Set] is disabled. [OIS/2] functions

as the number reset button.

Memo :

Settings cannot be made in the following cases.

[TC/UB] B [TC Generator] has been set to

“Regen”.

Recording Time Code in Continuation of

the Recorded Time Code on SD Card

Menu screen is displayed.

The camera recorder is not in the Camera

mode.

This camera recorder is equipped with the time

code reader.

Setting Time Code

Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to “Regen”.

When the camera recorder enters from

recording standby mode to recording mode,

it reads the time code already recorded on

the SD card and records the new time code

in continuation of that value.

Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] to a value

other than “Regen”.

Hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button and

press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.

The same data as the user’s bit already

recorded on the SD card is recorded.

Memo :

When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to

“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code

follows the settings in [TC/UB] B [Drop Frame]

instead of the clip settings.

Cursor

(A P124 [ Drop Frame ] )

During drop frame

During non-drop frame

Set the time code (hour, minute, second,

frame).

Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place the

cursor at the item to set, then use the cross-

shaped button (JK) to change the values.

Memo :

Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.

The cursor moves to the time digit (left).

Setting Time Code Generator 79

Setting the User’s Bit

You can add the date, time or an 8-digit

hexadecimal number as the user’s bit to the

recorded image.

Select [TC/UB]B “Preset” and press the Set

button (R).

The [Preset] setting screen appears.

Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to place

the cursor at the item to set, then use the

cross-shaped button (JK) to change the

values.

Selecting a Recording Mode

Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets

between A and F can be specified for the user’s

bit.

Recording date/time information to the user’s

bit

Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to “Date” or

“Time”, and press the Set button (R).

(A P124 [ UB Mode ] )

TC/UB

The date or time information is recorded to the

Cursor

user’s bit.

Memo :

When “Date” or “Time” is set, [Preset] appears

as “-” and cannot be set.

“Time” is displayed in the 24-hour format.

Memo :

Presetting the User’s Bit

Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to

“0”. The cursor moves to the left.

Recording arbitrary information (8-digit

hexadecimal) to the user’s bit

Check the values and press the Set button

Set [TC/UB] B [UB Mode] to “Preset”, and

press the Set button (R).

(R).

The user’s bit is set and the screen returns to

(A P124 [ UB Mode ] )

[TC/UB].

To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]

button.

TC/UB

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button.

Returns to the normal screen.

UB Mode

Preset

Date

Time

Preset

Memo :

When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to

“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as

“<Regen>” and cannot be selected.

80 Setting the User’s Bit

Settings and Operation of the Camera

Recorder

Synchronizing Time Code

on Another Camera

Set to Camera mode.

This camera recorder is equipped with a time code

Set [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] as follows.

input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).

Slave device:

Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]

terminal and synchronize to the time code.

Select “Free Run(Ext)”.

Master device:

Connect the [TC] terminal of the master

device with the [TC] terminal of the slave

device.

Select “Free Run”.

Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display

screen.

Set the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the master device

to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the

slave device to “IN”.

Set the master device and run the time

code.

When the built-in time code generator is

synchronized with the external time code

data input, the Z icon on Display screen lights

up.

Master Device

When time code is not synchronized or time

code input is not available, the Z icon goes

out.

[OUT]

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Slave Device (This Camera Recorder)

[IN]

Memo :

The built-in time code generator will continue

operation even when the master device is

disconnected after synchronization.

User’s bit will become data in the master device.

Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera 81

Setting Zebra Pattern

When the luminance level range for displaying

zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra

pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified

luminance levels during shooting.

Display the zebra pattern.

Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to display the zebra

pattern in the specified range.

Set [LCD/VF] B [Shooting Assist] B [Zebra]

to “On”.

(A P126 [ Zebra ] )

Specify the brightness (luminance) level

range for displaying zebra pattern.

Specify the upper and lower limits of the

luminance level in [LCD/VF] B [Shooting

Assist] B [Zebra] B [Top] and [Bottom].

During zebra pattern display,

(zebra icon)

is displayed on the display screen in Camera

mode.

Memo :

Item

Top

Settings

Options

“Zebra” is assigned to [ZEBRA/5] button in

factory default.

Upper luminance 5%, 10% to 95%,

limit for displaying 98%, 100%, Over

[Zebra]

“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user

buttons.

Bottom Lower luminance 0%, 5% to 95%,

limit for displaying 98%, 100%

[Zebra]

(A P118 [ Color Space ] )

Memo :

The timing to detect the zebra pattern display

can be configured only when “J-Log1” or “HLG”

is selected in [Color Space] and “Cam” or “Cam

+ Return” is selected in [Convert to ITU709].

(A P125 [ Convert to ITU709 ] )

(A P126 [ Detect ] )

82 Setting Zebra Pattern

Setting Spot Meter

Color of Frame

Indicating the

Position

Item

Settings

The brightness of the object during shooting is

displayed.

Max & Min

Displays the

Max: Green

This function is useful when setting video or stage

lighting or when specifying camera exposure.

A cursor indicating the location and the brightness

(%) of that location are displayed in the images

shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

brightness (%)

and positions of

the brightest and

darkest areas in

the screen.

Min: Yellow

Zebra patterns display the brightness of output

video signals.

Frames may also

be stopped at the

current positions.

(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )

This function allows you to check the brightness

of input images from the lens without depending

on image processing such as gamma curve.

When [Color Space] is set to a value other than

“HLG” and “J-Log1”, the dynamic range of the

camera recorder is max. 400% and a brightness

range of 0% to 400% is displayed.

Max

Displays the

Green

Yellow

Green

brightness (%)

and position of the

brightest area in

the screen.

Frames may also

be stopped at the

current positions.

The value of the spot meter changes according

to the setting of [LCD/VF] B [Convert to

ITU709]/[White Level] when [Color Space] is set

to “HLG”.

Min

Displays the

brightness (%)

and position of the

darkest area in the

screen. Frame

may also be

When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and

[LCD/VF] B [Convert to ITU709]/[White Level] is

set to “72.5%”, the dynamic range of the camera

recorder is max. 458% and a brightness range

of 0% to 458% is displayed.

stopped at the

current positions.

Manual

Displays the

When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, the

dynamic range of the camera recorder is max.

800% and a brightness range of 0% to 800% is

displayed.

brightness (%) of (Blinks in green

the specified

position.

when specifying

the position)

Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of

Memo :

the user buttons.

Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra

(A P150 [W Resolution/ G Resolution] )

Press the user button that is assigned with

display range.

Select one of the following from [Camera

Function] B [User Switch Set] B [Spot

Meter].

“Spot Meter”.

The operation switches as below when the

button is pressed.

(A P116 [ Spot Meter ] )

Setting Spot Meter 83

When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected

When [Manual] is selected

The cursors appear according to the setting

The brightness of the cursor position is

when the button is pressed.

displayed when the button is pressed.

Green and yellow frames appear, and the

brightness levels of these areas are displayed.

Cursor

(Green)

Cursor

Brightness

(Green)

Indication

Brightness

Indication

Cursor

(Yellow)

By pressing the button, the cursors and

brightness indication disappear.

Hold down the button in the state in A, the

positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest

(Min) areas in the screen are automatically

detected with regard to the changes of the

object, and the brightness level of these areas

are displayed.

Cursor

(Max: Green)

Brightness

Hold down the button in the state in A or B, the

cursor blinks in green.

Indication

Cursor

Move the cursor with the cross-shaped button

(JKHI) to specify the position to display the

brightness.

(Min:Yellow)

When you decide on the position, press the Set

button (R) to confirm.

Pressing the button in the state in B stops the

automatic position detection. The frames are

fixed at the stopped positions and the

brightness levels are displayed.

Brightness

Indication

By pressing the button, the cursors and

brightness indication disappear.

Cursor

(Blinks in

green)

Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and

the brightness is displayed.

Memo :

When moving the cursor position, [Shutter]/[AE

Level] control is disabled.

When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,

the frame is fixed in the center.

84 Setting Spot Meter

Acquiring Positioning

Information by GPS A

Reception

Status

Display

(No

Positioning Status

GPS reception Receiving strong

in progress GPS signal. UTC

(signal strength: and positioning

strong)

information can be

obtained and

recorded.

This camera recorder comes with a built-in GPS

function. The GPS function is able to record the

positioning information.

GPS function is The [GPS] item is

During playback, you can also display the recorded

information on the playback screen.

(A P101 [Playing back] )

display) turned off

set to “Off”.

Memo :

If positioning cannot be performed after waiting

for several minutes, this means GPS reception

is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.

Move to an open place with no obstructions.

Otherwise, GPS information will not be recorded

when shooting is performed.

Set [System] B [GPS] to “On”.

(A P148 [ GPS A L ] )

Positioning starts when the H icon on the

display screen starts blinking.

After positioning is complete, the H icon

switches to a solid light and records the

positioning information during shooting.

The icon that appears on the screen changes

according to the condition of signal reception

from the GPS satellite.

Signal may not be received depending on

circumstances such as locations that are

indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the

geographical conditions.

Precision error may occur in the position

information depending on the conditions of

reception.

00:00:00.00

Even when positioning is in progress,

information may be disrupted depending on the

condition of signal reception.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B

[Resolution] is set to “1080p”, configuring

[System] B [GPS] to “On” changes the setting to

“1080i”.

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

5600

ISO

F2. 8

102400

Reception

Status

Display

Positioning Status

[GPS] is set to GPS signal cannot

be received. UTC

and positioning

information cannot

be obtained.

“On”, but signal

cannot be

(Yellow)

received

GPS search in UTC information

progress

can be obtained,

but not positioning

information.

(Blink)

GPS reception Receiving weak

in progress GPS signal. UTC

(signal strength: and positioning

weak)

information can be

obtained and

recorded.

GPS reception Receiving GPS

in progress signal. UTC and

(signal strength: positioning

medium)

information can be

obtained and

recorded.

Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS A L

Caution :

Viewing Recorded Videos

Immediately (Clip Review)

During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and

[REC] buttons are enabled.

Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review

and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.

Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and

enter recording mode. It will take some time to

start recording after the button is pressed.

When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the

whole clip is played back.

You can check (review) the last recorded video clip

on the screen.

However, the video clip cannot be played back if

the settings of the camera recorder are different

from the video format (Resolution/Frame Rate/Bit

Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.

(A P151 [W Bit Rate/ G Bit Rate] )

(A P152 [ SD Aspect ] )

Only video clips in the currently selected slot can

be reviewed.

When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip

Review function is disabled.

Clip Review is unavailable when Clip

Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYL”, yellow

text). To operate Clip Review, use the

[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYL” (white text)

first.

Memo :

To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any

of the user buttons.

Press the user button assigned with the

“Clip Review” function during standby

(“STBY” is displayed).

Clip Review is unavailable when the camera

recorder is connected to an external equipment

and the equipment is in recording state.

Clip Review is unavailable when operating View

Remote via network connection.

Playback of the configured section starts.

Memo :

The video clip is played back according to the

setting in [Camera Function] B [User Switch

Set] B [Clip Review]. By default setting (Last

5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip is played

back.

(A P116 [ Clip Review ] )

Clip Review does not function during live

streaming.

Clip Review does not function while the record

trigger is in the REC state.

When playback is complete, the camera

recorder exits Clip Review and returns to

“STBY” (recording standby) mode.

86 Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)

Displaying the Histogram Recording

Simultaneously at Two

The histogram shows the brightness distribution,

and is employed mainly for checking the exposure

of the image.

Different Definitions

By setting [System] to “HD+Web”, you can record

simultaneously at two different definitions.

Set the histogram feature to ON.

Set [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B

When HD+Web is selected:

[Histogram] to “On”.

Records a high-definition (HD) file to slot A and

a web file to slot B at the same time.

Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD

file.

You can also press the user button that is

assigned with “Histogram”.

Set the upper and lower limits of the

Memo :

histogram display.

If a recordable SD card is inserted into only one

of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.

The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.

Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.

After setting, the brightness level is displayed in

red color.

Item

Top

Settings

Options

Sets the maximum 5% to 110% (in 5 %

brightness limit for increments)

changing the

[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.

Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.

(“No Media” appears if there is no card in slot A

while a card is inserted into slot B.)

histogram display

color

Playback of web files is only possible from slot

B when “HD+Web” is selected.

Bottom Sets the minimum 0% to 105% (in 5 %

brightness limit for increments)

changing the

histogram display

color

Series Rec

o When the upper limit is set to 110% and the lower

limit to 0%

Series Rec mode is specified in the factory

default.

([System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode] is set to

“Series”.)

If both the slots are loaded with recordable

cards, pressing the [REC] button starts

recording only to the media in the selected slot.

When the remaining space in the selected

media runs out, recording continues by

automatically activating the media in the other

slot.

The area in red is not displayed.

o When the upper limit is set to 90% and the lower

limit to 10%

The slot mode can be identified on the status

screen.

Bottom

Top

How to read the histogram

The vertical axis denotes the number of pixels.

The horizontal axis denotes the pixel

brightness.

Displaying the Histogram 87

Dual Rec

Stop recording.

Press the [REC] button again.

Recording to both slots stops, and both the

card slot marks turn white.

If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards

in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to

“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts

recording simultaneously to the media in both

the slots.

The same clips are recorded to both cards.

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

The clips recorded to the media in both the slots

are identical, and two clips of the same content

can be created only on this camera recorder.

White

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Memo :

During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the

card slot marks light up in red.

During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two

cards with a different amount of remaining

space, if the space of one card runs out,

recording to both slots will stop automatically.

After recording stops, recording automatically

resumes for the card with remaining space.

Although the clips are separated in this case, the

clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging

them on the timeline of the editing software since

they are recorded seamlessly.

Setting to Dual Rec Mode

If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the

two slots are different from each other, and the

time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the

Regen mode for the selected card slot will be

enabled in the next recording.

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode]

to “Dual”.

(A P91 [Special Recording] )

Start recording.

When [WFormat] is set to “High-Speed”, “Dual”

cannot be selected.

Insert recordable media in both slots, and

press the [REC] button.

In the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media

in both slots starts at the same time.

Both the card slot marks turn red, and the

status indicators of both the card slots also

light up in red.

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

Lit in red

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

88 Dual Rec

Caution :

Backup Rec

To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is

recommended that you start recording by

making use of two cards with the same capacity

and from the formatted state.

The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use

of the media in slot B for backup recording by

controlling the starting and stopping of recording

in slot B without using the [REC] button.

Start or stop the recording using [System] B

[Record Set] B [Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] or

press the user button that is assigned with

“Backup Trig”.

You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode

with a special recording mode. While in the Dual

Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to

“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval

Rec”, or “Frame Rec”.

When both slots are inserted with recordable

cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)

operation can be performed. If a recordable

media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can

also start recording with one card.

Slot A starts

recording

Slot B stops

recording

Slot B starts

recording

Slot A stops

recording

In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by

switching from one slot to another cannot be

performed. Continuous recording will not be

performed if a recordable media is inserted in a

slot after recording to the other slot has started.

When recording to one slot is in progress with

the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting

a recordable media to the other slot does not

enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the

Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily

(excluding pausing recording in the Clip

Continuous Rec mode), and start again.

When one of the cards is accidentally removed

while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec

mode, recording to the card in the other slot will

continue. However, repair of the accidentally

removed card by the recovery function may fail.

If an error occurs on one of the cards while

recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,

recording of the erroneous card stops, while that

of the other card continues.

Clip 2

Slot A

Slot B

Clip 1

Clip 3

Memo :

During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot

Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control

recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and

backup recording can only be performed on this

camera recorder.

You can record without worrying about missing

the important scenes by setting slot B to be

always recording (backup recording) and using

the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only

the required scenes in slot A.

It is recommended to use a media with high

capacity in slot B.

Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec

mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode

or appending of OK marks, can only be

performed on the card in the selected slot.

Backup cannot be selected when [WFormat] is

configured to “High-Speed”, “Exchange” (U

model) or “MP4” (E model).

Dual Rec 89

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Slot Mode]

to “Backup”.

Start normal recording (normal recording

into slot A)

Press any of the [REC] buttons.

Recording into the media in slot A starts.

(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)

The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected

state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks

in red.

The slot mode can be identified on the status

screen.

Start backup recording. (Backup recording

into slot B)

Select “REC” in [System] B [Record Set] B

[Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] and press the

Set button (R).

Red (not selected)

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

You can also press the user button that is

assigned with “Backup Trig”.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

100min

50min

Backup recording into slot B starts.

The card slot mark of slot B turns red

(selected state), and the status indicator of

slot B also blinks in red.

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

Stop normal recording.

Press any of the [REC] buttons again.

Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot

mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).

The characters “RREC” (red) changes back

to “STBY” (white).

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

100min

50min

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

The status indicator of slot A goes out.

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Red (selected)

White (not selected)

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

100min

50min

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

90 Backup Rec

Stop backup recording.

Special Recording

Select [STBY] in [System] B [Record Set] B

[Slot Mode] B [Backup Rec] and press the

Set button (R).

Besides the normal recording mode, four special

recording methods are available in this camera

recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,

Frame Rec and Interval Rec.

You can also press the user button that is

assigned with “Backup Trig”.

Select a mode from [System] B [Record Set] B

[Rec Mode].

(A P153 [ Pre Rec Time ] )

Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot

mark of slot B turns white (unselected state).

The status indicator of slot B lights up in

green.

Memo :

Special recording cannot be selected when

[System]

[Record Set]

[Record Format]

[System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “HD+Web” or

“High-Speed”.

White

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

Pre Rec

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec

Time], you can start recording video and audio

before actual recording starts based on the [Pre

Rec Time] setting.

When starting actual recording while the camera

recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYO)

mode, you can start recording a few seconds

earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.

Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete

event without missing the initial scenes even if

you start the recording late.

100min

50min

ND1

/ 60

/64

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Memo :

During backup recording, if the space of one

card runs out, recording stops only for the card

that is full.

When recording to both slots is stopped,

recording in the Regen mode will be enabled for

the card slot in which recording started.

When recording is started in the other slot while

recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is

split and simultaneous recording to the other

card starts.

Memo :

Pre Rec Time can be set in [System] B [Record

Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Pre Rec Time].

When [System] is set to “4K”:

Fixed at “5sec”

When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”:

“5sec”, “10sec” or “15sec”

When recording is stopped for either slot A or B

while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot

which is still recording is split.

Although the clips are separated during

recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by

arranging them on the timeline of the editing

software since they are recorded seamlessly.

Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during

backup recording.

(A P96 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter

Trig)] )

When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec

Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.

Backup Rec 91

Clip Continuous Rec

Completed Clip

In normal recording, when the recording stops,

the image, audio, and accompanying data from

the start till the end of the recording are recorded

as one “clip” on the SD card.

(Recorded video and audio)

This mode allows you to consolidate several

rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.

Recording starts a

number of seconds

earlier based on the

[Pre Rec Time] setting

Example:

In normal recording, three clips are generated as

Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.

However, recording in this mode generates only

one clip.

Press [REC]

(Recording starts) (Recording stops)

Press [REC]

Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.

(Recording starts) (Recording resumes)

(Recording resumes)

Press [REC]

Press and hold [REC]

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]

to “Pre Rec”.

The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYO”).

(Recording pauses) (Recording pauses) (Recording stops)

Recording 1

Recording 2

Recording 3

Press the [REC] button to start recording in

Pre Rec mode.

The display changes (“STBYO” B “RRECO”)

and the card slot status indicator lights up in

red.

Completed Clip

(Recorded video and audio)

Press the [REC] button again to pause

recording. The display changes (“RRECO” B

“STBYO”) and the card slot status indicator

lights up in green.

Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3

Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.

Caution :

(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos

When the interval between start and stop

recording is short, “STBYO” may not be

displayed immediately after recording is

complete.

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]

to “Clip Continuous”.

The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYL”).

“RRECO” B “STBYO” (“STBY” blinks in red) B

“STBYO” is displayed.

Start recording. (Recording 1)

Press the [REC] button to start recording in

Clip Continuous mode.

When the SD card becomes full during

recording, recording stops and “STOP” is

displayed.

The display changes (“STBYL” B “RRECL”)

and the card slot status indicator lights up in

red.

In the following cases, video and audio before

the specified Pre Rec time may not be recorded

even if recording starts.

Immediately after power on

Immediately after recording stops

Immediately after switching from Media

mode to Camera mode

Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]

Immediately after the end of Clip Review

Immediately after changing file format

Immediately after changing video format

92 Special Recording

Memo :

Pause recording.

The following operations cannot be performed

Press the [REC] button again to pause

recording. The display changes (“RRECL” B

“STBYL” (yellow text)).

while recording is paused (STBYL, yellow text).

Clip Review operation

The card slot status indicator remains lighted

Immediately (Clip Review)] )

in red.

Switching SD card slots

Memo :

Switching operation mode

When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the

camera recorder is paused (STBYL), the

display changes (“STBYL” (yellow text) B

“STBYL” (blinking yellow text) B “STBYL”

(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card

slot status indicator lights up in green.

(A P160 [Audio Level Meter] )

Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)

regardless of the menu settings.

Caution :

Do not remove the SD card during recording

(RRECL, red text) or recording pause (STBYL,

yellow text).

Resume recording. (Recording 2)

To remove the SD card in the “Clip

Continuous” mode, press the [CANCEL] button,

check that “STBYL” (white text) is displayed and

the card slot status indicator lights up in green

before you remove the card.

Press the [REC] button again to resume

recording. The display changes (“STBYL”

(yellow text) B “RRECL”).

The card slot status indicator remains lighted

in red.

To remove the SD card in the “Clip

Continuous” mode, press the [CANCEL] button,

check that “STBYL” (white text) is displayed and

the card slot status indicator lights up in green

before you remove the card.

Pause recording.

Press the [REC] button again to pause

recording. The display changes (“RRECL” B

“STBYL” (yellow text)).

The card slot status indicator remains lighted

When the SD card becomes full during

recording, recording stops and “STOP” is

displayed.

in red.

Resume recording. (Recording 3)

When the [POWER ON/OFF] switch is turned off

during recording or recording pause, recording

stops and power is cut off after a clip is

generated.

Press the [REC] button again to resume

recording. The display changes (“STBYL”

(yellow text) B “RRECL”).

The card slot status indicator remains lighted

If the power is cut off due to low battery power,

a proper clip may not be generated.

in red.

Press and hold the [REC] button.

Recording stops and the display changes

(“RRECL” B “STBYL”). A “clip” is generated.

The card slot status indicator lights up in

green.

Press the [REC] button again.

The display changes (“STBYL” B “RRECL”)

and the card slot status indicator lights up in

red.

A new “clip” is generated from here.

Special Recording 93

Frame Rec

Set the number of frames to record in [Rec

Frames].

In normal recording, when the recording stops, the

image and accompanying data from the start till the

end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on

the SD card.

To configure the setting, go to [System] B

[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].

(A P153 [ Rec Frames ] )

Start recording.

In this mode, recording starts with every press of

the [REC] button, and only the specified number of

frames is recorded.

Press the [REC] button to record only the

number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]

and pause.

The recording can be written to the media as a

single clip until it is stopped.

The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”

B “STBYM” (yellow text)).

Memo :

Audio will not be recorded.

The card slot status indicator lights up in

Until a specified amount of recordings is

accumulated, the file cannot be written to the

media.

green.

Repeat Frame Rec.

Press the [REC] button again to record only

the number of frames specified in [Rec

Frames] and pause.

If the specified amount is not reached when

recording is stopped, normal recording is

performed and frames are added to the ending

of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)

After the specified number of frames is recorded

and written to the media, recording will be

performed until the same number is

accumulated again.

The display changes (“STBYM” B “RRECM”

B “STBYM” (yellow text)).

Frame Rec continues until the recording is

stopped (step 5).

Press and hold the [REC] button.

The card slot status indicator lights up in

green.

Press [REC]

Press and hold [REC]

(Frame Rec stops)

(Frame Rec starts)

Press [REC]

Caution :

Recording resumes Recording resumes

Do not remove the SD card during recording

(“RRECM”, red text) or recording pause

(“STBYM”, yellow text).

Normal recording

(Padding data)

Pause

To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press

the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYM”

(white text) is displayed and the card slot status

indicator lights up in green before you remove

the card.

Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]

Actual clips recorded to the media

When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to “Free

Run” or “Free Run(Ext)”, the time code will be

recorded in “Rec Run”.

Specific amount of data

Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level

meter is grayed out.

Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]

to “Frame Rec”.

(A P153 [ Rec Interval ] )

The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYM”).

94 Special Recording

Interval Rec

Set the time interval to start recording in

[Interval Rec].

To configure the setting, go to [System] B

[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Interval].

In normal recording, when the recording stops, the

image and accompanying data from the start till the

end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on

the SD card.

In this mode, recording and pause are performed

repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the

specified number of frames is recorded.

The recording can be written to the media as a

single clip until it is stopped.

Start recording.

Press the [REC] button to record only the

number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]

and pause.

After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has

passed, recording starts again to record only

the number of frames specified in [Rec

Frames] and pause.

Memo :

Audio will not be recorded.

Until a specified amount of recordings is

accumulated, the file will not be written to the

media.

Interval Rec continues until the recording is

stopped.

After the specified number of frames is recorded

and written to the media, recording will be

performed until the same number is

accumulated again.

The display changes (“STBYN” B “RRECN”

B “STBYN” (red text) B “RRECN” B

“STBYN” (red text)).

If the specified amount is not reached when

recording is stopped, normal recording is

performed and frames are added to the ending

of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)

The card slot status indicator lights up in red.

Press the [REC] button.

The card slot status indicator lights up in

green.

The display becomes “STBYN”.

Press [REC]

(Interval Rec starts)

(Interval Rec stops)

Caution :

Do not remove the SD card during recording

(RRECN, red text) or recording pause (STBYN,

yellow text).

Recording resumes Recording resumes

[Rec Interval]

To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,

press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBYN”

(white text) is displayed and the card slot status

indicator lights up in green before you remove

the card.

Normal recording

Pause

(Padding data)

Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]

When [TC/UB] B [TC Generator] is set to “Free

Run” or “Free Run(Ext)”, the time code will be

recorded in “Rec Run”.

Actual clips recorded to the media

Audio cannot be recorded. The audio level

meter is grayed out.

(A P160 [Audio Level Meter] )

Specific amount of data

Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.

Set [System] B [Record Set] B [Rec Mode]

to “Interval Rec”.

The display changes (“STBY” B “STBYN”).

Set the number of frames to record in [Rec

Frames].

To configure the setting, go to [System] B

[Record Set] B [Rec Mode] B [Rec Frames].

(A P153 [ Rec Frames ] )

Special Recording 95

Splitting the Clips Freely

(Clip Cutter Trig)

Configuring Infrared

Recording

You can split the clips freely without having to stop

This camera recorder comes with a infrared

recording mode that is suitable for night recording.

Using infrared illumination allows images to be

captured naturally in a pitch-dark environment. It is

recommended for observation of animals without

alerting them or for natural facial expressions

without firing glaring flash light at the subject.

recording during shooting.

Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to

any of the user buttons.

Press the user button that is assigned with

Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.

Set [Camera Function] B [Infrared] to “On”.

“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.

A clip cut icon (Q) appears on the display

screen for 3 seconds, and the clip is split.

A “I” icon appears.

Caution :

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

Do not use infrared recording for capturing

strong light sources or heat sources. Doing so

may damage the camera recorder.

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

Memo :

The settings are fixed as followed when it is

ND1

/ 60

/64

configured to “On”.

4030 20 10

ISO

F2. 8

5600

102400

Manual focus

ND Filter“OFF”

Memo :

[Camera Function] B [Focus] B [AF Assist]

Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds

and [MF Assist] appear as “---”.

after the operation is performed.

All items other than [Color Space] and

This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is

set to “Backup”.

[Reverse Picture] under [Camera Process]

appear as “---”.

This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is

set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.

The zoom and focus positions will be initialized

after the settings are changed.

When [Infrared] is configured to “On”, if the type

of light source changes after focus is

established, the image may go out of focus.

The split clips are recorded seamlessly without

interruptions in the video.

When “4K EXT (SSD)”, Exchange (U model) or

MP4 (E model) is selected, the clip cutter

function cannot be used.

96 Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig)

[OIS/2] Button

Playing Recorded Clips

Switches the selection status of the clip

selected by the cursor.

To play back clips recorded in a recording media,

Clips being selected are displayed with

check mark.

switch to the Media mode.

Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in the

Camera mode to enter the Media mode. A

thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the

recording media is displayed.

[ONLINE/3] Button

Enters the action selection screen.

[DISPLAY] Button

Switches between the “Standard Screen” and

“Detailed Screen”.

[STATUS] Button

Displays the media information screen.

You can play back the selected clip on the

thumbnail screen.

Memo :

When a recording media without any clips is

inserted, “No Clips” is displayed.

Thumbnail Screen

Operation Buttons

Use the operation buttons on the side control panel

or front side of the camera recorder to operate the

thumbnail screen.

“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are

available.

Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the

screens.

Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording

from the oldest to most recent.

Standard screen

FOCUS ASSIST/1

OIS/2

ONLINE/3

TIME CODE

MENU/THUMB

AE LEVEL

DISPLAY STATUS

CANCEL

A D

[MENU/THUMB] Button

Displays the menu.

Press this button to close the menu screen

during menu display and return to the

thumbnail screen.

Recording Media Information

Displaysthestatuswhenrepairisrequiredfor

the selected recording media or the status of

the write-protect switch for the SD card.

The inserted recording media will not be

displayed if [System] is different.

Cross-Shaped Button (JKHI)

Moves the cursor.

Set (Play) Button

Use the [SLOT SEL] button to switch

Sets the values and items. (Confirm)

Plays back the selected clip.

[CANCEL] (Stop) Button

Cancels settings and returns to the previous

screen.

between slots A and B. Clips from different

slots cannot be displayed at the same time.

W z Write-protect switch of the SD card

in slot A is set.

SD card in slot B needs to be

restored or formatted, or is an

unsupported SD card.

[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button

Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by

the cursor.

SSD media in [EXT.SLOT]

If an OK mark has been appended, it will be

deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be

appended.

Playing Recorded Clips 97

Clip Mark

Memo :

Displays the clip information (properties).

This is dependent on the [System], [Format],

[Resolution], [Frame Rate] and [Bit Rate]

settingsinthe[System] B RecordSet B [Record

Format] menu.

(A P149 [ System ] )

Clip Name

The file name (clip number) of the selected clip

is displayed.

OK Mark

Clip is appended with OK mark.

Operation Guide

Memo :

Displays a guide for the current operation

buttons.

Clips appended with OK marks cannot be

The action selection screen is displayed

when the [ONLINE/3] button is pressed.

deleted on the camera recorder.

Continued From Mark

(A P99 [Actions] )

This mark indicates that the current clip is

continued from another SD card when

recording is divided and made on several SD

cards.

Recording Start Time

Displays the recording start time of the clip.

Memo :

The date/time display is dependent on the

settings in [System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style].

Uneditable Mark

This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot

be appended to or deleted from the clip, and

the clip cannot be deleted.

Scroll Bar

Continue Mark

Indicates the scroll position.

This mark indicates that recording of the current

clip is continued to another SD card when

recording is divided and made on several SD

cards.

Black space below the scroll bar (white)

indicates that there are more pages.

When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,

this indicates the last page.

Check Mark

Remaining Battery Power

A green check mark is displayed when the

(A P104 [Selecting and Performing

clip is selected.

Number of Clips

Magenta and gray check marks are

displayed in multiple selection mode.

If none of the clips are selected, the “running

number/total number of clips” of the clip to be

displayed appears.

Operations on Multiple Clips] )

Even if only one clip is selected, the number

of selected clips in the current slot is

displayed.

Cursor

Clip to be worked on. Use the cross-shaped

button (JKHI) to move the cursor.

Network Connection Icon

Thumbnail Substitution Display

The network connection status is displayed.

A clip with corrupted management information.

It cannot be played back even if you press the

Set (Play) button.

A clip that cannot be played back nor displayed

in thumbnail with the current video format

settings.

It cannot be played back even if you press the

Set (Play) button.

98 Playing Recorded Clips

Detailed screen

Actions

Items that are common with the Standard screen

will not be described. Refer to “[Standard

screen] (A P 97)”.

The action selection screen is displayed when the

[ONLINE/3] button is pressed.

The following operations can be performed.

Item

Description

Select All Clips Selects all clips.

Select OK

Marked

Selects all clips appended with

OK mark.

Select Range

Specifies the range when

selecting multiple clips.

(A P104 [Selecting Multiple

Clips Randomly] )

Deselect All

Add OK Mark

Clears all clip selections.

Appends an OK mark.

Thumbnail

Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.

Use the cross-shaped button (HI) to move the

cursor.

This Clip:

Appends an OK mark to the

clip pointed by the cursor.

Selected Clips:

Scroll Mark (DE)

Appends an OK mark to the

clips selected (appended

with check mark).

All Clips:

If there are previous clips, D appears on the

left.

If there are more clips, E appears on the right.

The marks will not be displayed if there are

no clips before and after the current clip.

Appends an OK mark to all

clips.

Metadata

Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.

You can use the cross-shaped button (JK) to

scroll.

Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.

This Clip:

Deletes the OK mark of the

clip pointed by the cursor.

Selected Clips:

Deletes the OK mark of the

clips selected (appended

with check mark).

All Clips:

Deletes the OK mark of all

clips.

Playing Recorded Clips 99

Item

FTP Upload

Description

Playing back

Uploads a clip to the FTP server.

Use the operation buttons on the side control panel

This Clip:

of the camera recorder to play back.

Uploads the clip pointed by

the cursor.

Selected Clips:

Uploads the clips selected

(appended with check

mark).

All Clips:

Uploads all clips.

Delete Clips

Deletes clip. However, clips with

FOCUS ASSIST/1

OIS/2

ONLINE/3

OK mark cannot be deleted.

TIME CODE

MENU/THUMB

AE LEVEL

This Clip:

Deletes the clip pointed by

the cursor.

CANCEL

GAIN

Selected Clips:

Deletes the clips selected

(appended with check

mark).

WHT BAL

SHUTTER

Set Button (R)

Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the

cursor.

All Clips:

Deletes all clips.

You can press the cross-shaped button (HI)

to perform frame-by-frame forward playback

during pause mode.

Trim This Clip

Memo :

Trims the clip pointed by the

cursor.

Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)

The object of action is the clip of the current slot

[J/K] Button:

being displayed.

Skips in the reverse or forward direction.

[H/I] Button:

[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are

no selected (appended with check mark) clips.

[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more

than one selected (appended with check mark)

clips.

During Playback:

Fast forwards in the reverse or forward

direction.

While paused:

If the write-protect switch of an SD card is set,

OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and

the clips cannot be deleted and trimmed.

Frame-by-frame playback in the reverse

or forward direction.

[CANCEL] Button

Stops playback.

In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to

the clip to be played back.

Move the cursor to the clip to be played back

using the cross-shaped button (JKH I).

Press the Set button (R).

Playback of the selected clip starts.

Audio Output during Playback

You can confirm the playback sound from the

monitor speaker, or the headphone connected

to the [x] terminal. When a headphone is

connected to the [x] terminal, sound cannot be

output from the monitor speaker.

(A P176 [Connect the headphone.] )

Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and

headphone using the [MONITOR +/-] volume

adjustment button on the LCD monitor section

of the camera recorder.

100 Playing Recorded Clips

Time Code Playback

Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can

be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.

Memo :

The time code is also superimposed on the

video signal output from the [SDI OUT] terminal.

If a section without time code is played back, the

time code will stop. However, playback will

continue.

Displaying Information during Shooting

During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button

shows the display screen. Pressing the

[ONLINE/3] button during shooting switches the

display information between camera information

display, GPS display and turning off the display.

The GPS display displays information on the

recording location of the video being played

back only when GPS information has been

recorded.

Camera information display displays only

information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White

Balance that have been recorded.

0dB

F1.6

1/100

5600K

Camera Information Display

Display Off

+35.483197

+139.652172

GPS Display

Memo :

Trimming information is displayed while

trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the

[ONLINE/3] button does not switch the display.

Playing Recorded Clips 101

Deleting Clips

Delete clip.

Memo :

Select [Delete] using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

Deleting starts.

Clips appended with OK marks cannot be

deleted on the camera recorder.

Delete This Clip?

Read-only clips can be deleted on a PC.

Delete

Cancel

Deleting One Clip

Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in

[Delete Clips] B [This Clip] in the menu.

Memo :

Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.

Deleting...

Stop

During Thumbnail Screen

Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.

Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using

the cross-shaped button (JKH I).

Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips

To select and delete multiple clips, refer to

“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple

Clips] (A P 104)”.

Deleting All Clips

Delete all clips that are displayed.

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

The action selection screen is displayed.

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

Select [Delete Clips] B [This Clip] and press

The action selection screen is displayed.

the Set button (R).

Select [Delete Clips] B [All Clips].

A screen to confirm deletion appears.

Select [Delete] and press the Set button

(R).

A screen to confirm deletion appears.

Deleting starts.

Memo :

This Clip

Selected Clips

All Clips

The time taken to delete clips depends on the

number of clips to be deleted.

102 Deleting Clips

During Playback or Pause Screen

Appending/Deleting OK

Mark

Press [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button during clip

playback.

If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK

mark will be appended.

You can append OK marks to the clips for

If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the

OK mark will be deleted.

important scenes.

Clips appended with OK marks cannot be

deleted, thus protecting the important clips.

When the camera recorder is in Media mode,

you can delete the OK marks appended during

recording, or append/delete OK marks after

shooting.

During Thumbnail Screen

Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK

mark will be appended.

If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the

OK mark will be deleted.

OK Mark

Memo :

The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended

or deleted during playback.

Appending/Deleting OK Mark of

Multiple Clips

To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple

clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing

Operations on Multiple Clips] (A P 104)”.

OK Mark

Appending/Deleting OK Mark 103

Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly

Selecting and Performing

Operations on Multiple

Clips

Move the cursor to a clip without a check

mark, and press the [[OIS/2] button.

A green check mark appears on the clip.

Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail

screen or playback screen display.

After selecting multiple clips, perform

appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips

using the action selection screen.

After selecting multiple clips, the selections will

be canceled by the following operations.

When [Deselect All] in the action menu is

selected

Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.

When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail

Multiple clips can be selected.

Press the [ONLINE/3] button while the

multiple clips are selected.

screen

When the recording media is removed

When switching the slot in use

Appends OK mark together:

[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]

Deletes OK mark together:

[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]

Uploading selected clips to the FTP server

together:

[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]

Deletes selected clips together:

[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]

Memo :

Selecting clips appended with check mark and

pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the

selection.

If the operation is performed on multiple clips at

the same time, a progress bar appears. You can

stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)

while the operation is in progress. However, it is

not possible to undo operations that are

completed.

104 Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips

Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

Select “Select Range” in the action

selection screen, and press the Set button

(R).

Press the Set button (R) to confirm the

range.

The check marks change from magenta to

green.

Pressing the [ONLINE/3] button while the

multiple clips are selected displays the action

selection screen. The following operations

can be performed.

Select All Clips

Appends OK mark together:

Select OK Marked

[Add OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]

Select Range

Deselect All

Deletes OK mark together:

Add OK Mark...

[Delete OK Mark] B [Selected Clips]

Delete OK Mark...

FTP Upload...

Uploading selected clips to the FTP server

together:

[FTP Upload] B [Selected Clips]

Deletes selected clips together:

[Delete Clips] B [Selected Clips]

Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)

of the range for multiple selection, and

press the Set button (R).

Memo :

Selecting clips appended with check mark and

pressing the [[OIS/2] button will cancel the

selection.

Move the cursor to the other end of the

range.

Magenta check marks appear on the clips

within the range. (Including clips that were

already selected.)

If the operation is performed on multiple clips at

the same time, a progress bar appears. You can

stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)

while the operation is in progress. However, it is

not possible to undo operations that are

completed.

Gray check marks appear on selected clips

that are outside the range.

Selected Range:

Start Position

Selected Range:

End Position

Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple Clips 105

Trimming Recorded Clips

It is possible to crop (trim) the necessary parts of a

clip that is recorded to the recording media.

The trimmed clip is saved as a separate file to the

recording media and the original clip remains

intact.

Trimming information

W or Y

Indicates the available space in

the storage media (W or Y)

Indicates the time code of the in

point

Indicates the time code of the out

point

Indicates the duration from the in

point to the out point

Switch to Media mode.

Memo :

Switch the mode using the [MODE] selection

button on the side operation panel.

The trimmed clip will be saved to the same card

slot as that of the original clip.

Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed.

Move the cursor to the clip to be trimmed using

the cross-shaped button (JKH I).

[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is 10

minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be

performed in this case.

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [WFrame Rate] is set to “

70M (XHQ)”, [Duration] appears in yellow if the

duration is 6 minutes or longer. Trimming

cannot be performed in this case.

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] is configured to “4K EXT

(SSD)” or “4K”, [Duration] appears in yellow if

it is 3 minutes or longer. Trimming cannot be

performed in this case.

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

[Duration] appears in yellow if the duration is

longer than the recordable time on the storage

media. Trimming cannot be performed in this

case.

The action selection screen is displayed.

Select [Trim This Clip], and press the Set

button (R).

Playback of the selected clip starts.

When trimming starts, the display switches to

the Media Display screen.

Select Range

Deselect All

Specify the in point.

Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move

Add OK Mark...

Delete OK Mark...

FTP Upload...

the video to the in point.

(A P100 [Playing back] )

Delete Clips...

Trim This Clip

Specify the in point by pressing the [FOCUS

ASSIST/1] button at the point you want to

start trimming.

Specify the out point.

Operate buttons such as H/I or J/K to move

1000/2000

282min

3840x2160

30p 140M

00:00:00.00

the video to the out point.

(A P100 [Playing back] )

Jan 24,2019

12 :34 :56

Specify the out point by pressing the [OIS/2]

button at the point you want to end trimming.

OUT

TRIM

Perform trimming.

30min

Press the [ONLINE/3] button to perform

trimming.

11:22:33.00

11:23:44.00

00:08:22

4030 20 10

Memo :

While trimming is in progress, you can press the

[CANCEL] button to return to the thumbnail

screen.

Guide

Operation guide

Position bar

When trimming the in and out point, the in point

trimmed may be up to one second before the

specified in point and the out point trimmed may

be up to one second behind the specified out

point.

6 : Current position of the video

Position to start trimming (in point)

Position to end trimming (out point)

106 Trimming Recorded Clips

[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button

Basic Operations in Menu

Screen

Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the

[Favorites Menu].

[OIS/2] Button

Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB

Preset] setting screen.

Pressing the [MENU/THUMB] button displays

the menu screen on the LCD monitor and

viewfinder.

[MENU/THUMB] Button

Various settings for shooting and playback can

be configured on the menu screen.

There are two types of menu screens - [Main

Menu] and [Favorites Menu].

Displays the menu screen. The [Main

Menu] screen is displayed by default.

During normal usage, [Main Menu] is

displayed if the previous menu operation

ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites

Menu] if the previous menu operation ended

at [Favorites Menu].

[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the

camera recorder, classified according to

functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]

allows users to customize the menu items freely.

(A P155 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used

Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )

Press this button to close the menu screen

during menu display and return to the normal

screen.

The operating procedures and main screen

displays are the same for both menus.

The menu screen can also be displayed on

external monitors connected to the [SDI OUT]

terminal.

Pressing and holding down the button while

the menu is displayed switches the [Main

Menu] screen to the [Favorites Menu] or vice

versa.

(A P130 [ Character ] )

Set Button (R)

Sets the values and items.

Operation Buttons

Cross-shaped Button (JKH I)

To operate the menu, use the cross-shaped

buttons on the side operation panel of the camera

recorder or the cross-shaped buttons at the front of

the camera or at the bottom of the lens.

Moves the cursor upward.

Moves the cursor downward.

Moves back to the previous item.

Moves forward to the next item.

[CANCEL] Button

CH2

PEAKING

DISPLAY STATUS

Cancels settings and returns to the previous

screen.

[DISPLAY] Button

Switches between the [Main Menu] and

[Favorites Menu] screens.

FOCUS ASSIST/1

OIS/2

ONLINE/3

AE LOCK/4

TIME CODE

MENU/THUMB

AE LEVEL

ZEBRA/5

CANCEL

GAIN

MARKER/6

WHT BAL

SHUTTER

Basic Operations in Menu Screen 107

Changing Setting Values

Display and Description of the Menu

Screen

Display Settings

Selecting Menu Items

Off

Audio Meter

Battery

Date/Time

Date Style

Time Style

Shutter

Display Settings

YMD

24hour

SEC

Audio Meter

Battery

Off

Time

Date/Time

Set

Cancel

Date Style

Time Style

Shutter

YMD

24hour

SEC

Menu Item to Change

Menu item to be changed.

Favorites

Add

A list of setting values F appears in a pop-up.

Operation Guide

Cursor

Guide for the current operation buttons.

Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-

Setting Values Before Change

shaped button (JK) to move the cursor

Setting values before changing. The

background of the item is displayed in blue.

Menu Item

Displays the names of the menu item and

sub-menu.

Scroll Bar

Indicates the scroll position.

Menu items with [...] after them indicates that

there is a sub-menu to access.

Cursor

Indicates the selected item. Use the cross-

shaped button (JK) to move the cursor

Fixed Item

Items that cannot be changed are displayed in

gray and cannot be selected.

List of Setting Values

A pop-up displaying a list of setting values for

selection.

Operation Guide

Guide for the current operation buttons.

The height of the pop-up depends on the

number of settings available. Use the scroll

bar D to confirm the current display status.

Setting Value

Setting values for the menu items.

For menus with sub-menus, values are not

displayed.

Scroll Bar

Indicates the scroll position.

Header

Indicates the current menu type with the line

color.

Blue

Green

[Main Menu] Screen

[Favorites Menu] (Operation

screen)

Magenta

[Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)

Remaining Battery Power

(A P172 [Configuring Setup Files] )

Memo :

If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold

separately) is not used, the battery mark which

indicates the battery level may not appear.

Menu Title

Title of the currently displayed menu.

108 Basic Operations in Menu Screen

Text Input with Software Keyboard

Use the software keyboard to enter the [Setup

File] subname, [Clip Name Prefix], and the settings

under [Network].

Character Entry Field

Field for entering the title.

You can enter up to 8 characters for the

[Setup File] subname or up to 4 characters

for the [Clip Name Prefix].

Character Cursor

Entering a subname

Select a character using the key cursor D, and

press the Set button (R) to input the selected

character at the position of the character cursor.

The character cursor moves to the next position

on the right each time a character is input.

The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys

Character Keys

Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to move

the key cursor D to the character you want to

enter.

Key Cursor

Indicates the currently selected character or

item. Use the cross-shaped button (JKHI) to

move the cursor.

Entering the [Clip Name Prefix]

Confirmation Buttons

(A P154 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )

Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button

(R) to confirm the title.

Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)

on the side control panel of the camera

recorder to abort character input and return

to the previous screen.

[SP] Space Key

Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the

side control panel of the camera recorder to

enter a space at the current position of the

character cursor B.

Cancel

Set

[3 ] Backspace Key

Settings under [Network]

Select [3 ] and press the Set button (R) on the

side control panel of the camera recorder to

delete the character on the left of the character

cursor B.

The keyboard displayed varies according to the

settings.

(A P135 [Network Menu] )

Arrow Keys

Moves the position of the character cursor B.

Character Switch Button

Switches the character buttons C to the upper

case, lower case, and symbols.

Basic Operations in Menu Screen 109

- [VF Bright] .................................. (A P 125)

- [VF Contrast] .............................. (A P 125)

- [LCD Contrast] ............................ (A P 125)

- [LCD Backlight] .......................... (A P 125)

- [LCD Mirror] ................................ (A P 125)

- [Convert to ITU709] .................... (A P 125)

- [LCD RGB Gain] ......................... (A P 126)

- [VF RGB Gain] ............................ (A P 126)

- [A/V Set...] ....................................... (A P 130)

- [Video Set...] ............................... (A P 130)

- [Audio Set...] ............................... (A P 132)

- [Network] ........................................ (A P 135)

- [Connection Setup...] .................. (A P 135)

- [Live Streaming...] ...................... (A P 135)

- [Return over IP...] ........................ (A P 135)

- [Web...] ....................................... (A P 135)

- [Metadata Server...] .................... (A P 135)

- [Upload Settings] ........................ (A P 135)

- [Import Metadata] ....................... (A P 135)

- [Zero Config] .............................. (A P 136)

- [Reset Network] .......................... (A P 136)

- [Overlay Settings...] A L ......... (A P 144)

- [Overlay Function] ...................... (A P 144)

- [Layout] ...................................... (A P 144)

- [Import User Layout] ................... (A P 144)

- [Delete User Layout] ................... (A P 144)

- [Type] ......................................... (A P 144)

- [Overlay Custom Menu]L* ..... (A P 144)

- [Output...] ................................... (A P 144)

- [Sportzcast] L ........................ (A P 145)

- [Watermark] ................................ (A P 145)

- [Full Screen Graphic...] ............... (A P 145)

- [Password Lock] ......................... (A P 145)

- [System...] ....................................... (A P 147)

- [Record Set...] ............................ (A P 147)

- [Media] ....................................... (A P 147)

- [Setup File] ................................. (A P 147)

- [Tally Lamp] ................................ (A P 147)

- [NETWORK LED] ....................... (A P 148)

- [STATUS LED] ........................... (A P 148)

- [LED Bright] ................................ (A P 148)

- [GPS] A L .......................... (A P 148)

- [Language] ................................. (A P 148)

- [Reset All] ................................... (A P 148)

- [Date/Time] ................................. (A P 148)

- [Date Style] ................................. (A P 148)

- [Time Style] ................................ (A P 149)

- [Time Zone] ................................ (A P 149)

- [Reserved] .................................. (A P 149)

- [System Information] ................... (A P 149)

Menu Screen Hierarchical

Chart

[Main Menu...] ..................................... (A P 110)

- [Camera Function...] ....................... (A P 111)

- [Bars] .......................................... (A P 111)

- [OIS] ........................................... (A P 111)

- [Shutter] ...................................... (A P 111)

- [AE Level] ................................... (A P 111)

- [AE Speed] ................................. (A P 111)

- [AE Area] .................................... (A P 111)

- [AGC Limit] ................................. (A P 111)

- [Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)] .............. (A P 112)

- [Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] ............ (A P 112)

- [EEI Limit] ................................... (A P 112)

- [Smooth Trans] ........................... (A P 112)

- [GAIN L] ...................................... (A P 112)

- [GAIN M] ..................................... (A P 112)

- [GAIN H] ..................................... (A P 112)

- [Zoom...] ..................................... (A P 112)

- [Focus...] .................................... (A P 112)

- [Face Detection...] ...................... (A P 112)

- [Infrared] ..................................... (A P 113)

- [User Switch Set...] ..................... (A P 113)

- [KEYLOCK] ................................ (A P 113)

- [Menu Access] ............................ (A P 113)

- [Camera Angle[Tagging]] L .... (A P 113)

- [Camera Process...] ........................ (A P 118)

- [Color Space] ............................. (A P 118)

- [Gamma] .................................... (A P 118)

- [Detail] ........................................ (A P 119)

- [Master Black] ............................ (A P 119)

- [Black Toe] ................................. (A P 120)

- [Knee] ......................................... (A P 120)

- [White Clip] ................................. (A P 121)

- [White Balance...] ....................... (A P 121)

- [Color Matrix] .............................. (A P 122)

- [Color Gain] ................................ (A P 122)

- [Reverse Picture] ........................ (A P 122)

- [Reset Process] .......................... (A P 122)

- [TC/UB...] ........................................ (A P 124)

- [TC Generator] ........................... (A P 124)

- [TC Preset] ................................. (A P 124)

- [UB Mode] .................................. (A P 124)

- [Drop Frame] .............................. (A P 124)

- [LCD/VF...] ...................................... (A P 125)

- [Shooting Assist...] ...................... (A P 125)

- [Marker Settings...] ..................... (A P 125)

- [Display Type...] .......................... (A P 125)

- [Display On/Off...] ....................... (A P 125)

- [VF Color] ................................... (A P 125)

Memo :

Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These

items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.

Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.

The display of the [Overlay Custom Menu] changes according to the imported data.

110 Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart

Shutter

Camera Function Menu

For specifying shutter-related settings.

Configure the value to “Step” (fixed value) or

“Variable” when operating the shutter with the

cross-shaped button (J K) on the side of the

camera recorder unit.

Menu screen for specifying operation settings

during shooting.

This item can only be selected in the Camera

mode.

Variable:

Bars

Sets to variable scan. Use this setting when

shooting a PC monitor.

Step:

For setting whether to output color bars.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter

speed by a fixed value.

Memo :

The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output

simultaneously with the color bar output.

(A P133 [ Test Tone ] )

[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]

AE Level

For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto

Exposure).

OIS

This can also be adjusted using the cross-shaped

button (H I) on the side of the camera recorder

unit.

For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.

When “On” is selected, set the Level.

To turn on the [Hard Lock] function, configure OIS

to “Off”.

[Setting Values: -6 to +6 (R0)]

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

AE Speed

(A P73 [Using the Image Stabilizer] )

For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto

Exposure).

Level

[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]

For setting the level of the image stabilizer.

[Setting Values: High, RNormal]

AE Area

Memo :

For configuring the AE detection area.

The icon changes according to the level set.

[Setting Values: Center, Bottom, RNormal]

(A P161 [Image Stabilizer Mark] )

When “High” is selected, correcting severe

camera shake may cause the area surrounding

the image to darken.

AGC Limit

For setting the maximum gain value of “AGC”,

which electrically boosts the sensitivity level

according to the brightness automatically.

Hard Lock

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “dB”:

When the Hard Lock feature is “On”, the IS (image

stabilization) lens is locked in place.

Use this feature when blurry image caused by

camera shake tends to occur due to strong

acceleration.

[Setting Values: 24 dB, R18 dB, 12 dB, 6 dB]

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “ISO”:

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

[Setting Values: ISO 12800, RISO 6400, ISO

(A P73 [About the Hard Lock Feature] )

3200, ISO 1600]

Memo :

Camera shake that causes image blur occurs

When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

when switching between “On” and “Off”.

Camera Function Menu 111

Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)

GAIN L, GAIN M, GAIN H

For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when

auto iris is enabled.

For setting the gain value of each position on the

[GAIN] selection switch.

[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, Open]

The setting is fixed at “AGC” in the Full Auto mode.

In addition, the sensitivity setting in [Lolux] is used.

(A P116 [ Lolux ] )

Memo :

When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “dB”:

[Setting Values: 24 dB, 21 dB, 18 dB, 15 dB, 12

dB, 9 dB, 6 dB, 3 dB, 0 dB, -3 dB, -6 dB]

(Default values for GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB,

GAIN H: 12dB)

Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)

For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when

auto iris is enabled.

[Setting Values: F16, RF11, F8, F5.6]

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “ISO” and [Camera Process] B [Color

Space] is set to a value other than “HLG”:

[Setting Values: ISO12800, ISO10000,

ISO8000, ISO6400, ISO5000, ISO4000,

ISO3200, ISO2500, ISO2000, ISO1600,

ISO1250, ISO1000, ISO800, ISO640, ISO500,

ISO400]

Memo :

When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

EEI Limit

For setting the shutter speed control range when

the Automatic Shutter mode (EEI) is enabled.

[Setting Values: 4F-stop, R3F-stop, 2F-stop]

(Default values for GAIN L: ISO800, GAIN M:

ISO1600, GAIN H: ISO3200)

Memo :

When “J-Log1” is selected for [Camera

Process] B [Color Space], the base ISO speed

for achieving the 800% dynamic range of [J-

Log1] is “[ISO1250]”. The square brackets

appear only in the case of the base ISO.

When [FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

Smooth Trans

For setting the shock reduction function, which

slows down the sudden change when switching

with the [GAIN] or [WHT BAL] switch.

[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]

Memo :

Zoom...

For specifying zoom settings.

(A P113 [Zoom Function Settings] )

This function is disabled when AGC is operating.

When “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected for [Camera

Process] B [Color Space], the setting is fixed at

“Off” and the selection cannot be changed.

Focus...

For specifying focus settings.

(A P114 [Focus Function Settings] )

Face Detection...

For specifying face detection settings.

(A P115 [Face Detection Function Settings] )

112 Camera Function Menu

Zoom Function Settings

Dynamic Zoom

Infrared

When “On” is selected, an I icon appears and the

camera recorder switches to the infrared recording

mode that is suitable for night recording.

For setting whether to enable the dynamic zoom

function.

Using infrared illumination allows images to be

captured naturally in a pitch-dark environment. It is

recommended for observation of animals without

alerting them or for natural facial expressions

without firing glaring flash light at the subject.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

On:

Enables the dynamic zoom (1x to 40x).

Off:

Enables only the optical zoom (1x to 20x).

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

Caution :

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or

“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off” and

cannot be selected.

Do not use infrared recording for capturing

strong light sources or heat sources. Doing so

may damage the camera recorder.

When [Digital Extender] is set to “On”, “Off”

becomes fixed and cannot be selected.

Memo :

This is fixed at “Off” when [FULL AUTO] is set to

“ON”.

Response

The settings are fixed as followed when it is

configured to “On”.

For specifying the speed of zoom response when

Dynamic Zoom is “On”.

Manual focus

[Setting Values: Slow, RNormal]

ND filter “OFF”

[Camera Function] B [Focus] B [AF Assist]

Memo :

and [MF Assist] appear as “---”.

When [Dynamic Zoom] is “Off”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

All items other than [Color Space] and

[Reverse Picture] under [Camera Process]

appear as “---”.

Digital Extender

The zoom and focus positions will be initialized

after the settings are changed.

For specifying whether to magnify the image (by 2

times). When “On” is selected, a F icon appears.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

When [Infrared] is configured to “On”, if the type

of light source changes after focus is

established, the image may go out of focus.

Memo :

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or

“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off” and

cannot be selected.

User Switch Set...

For specifying user button related settings.

When [Dynamic Zoom] is set to “On”, “Off”

becomes fixed and cannot be selected.

(A P62 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face

KEYLOCK

Handle Zoom Speed

For specifying the settings when the [KEYLOCK]

switch is set to “ON”.

[Setting Values: RKeylock Except Rec, Keylock

All]

This function allows you to set the zoom speed of

the zoom lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/

VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.

[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]

Menu Access

For specifying settings on the behavior when

accessing the menu using the [MENU/THUMB]

button.

[Setting Values: Press and Hold, ROne Press]

Camera Angle[Tagging] L

For specifying tagging settings for the camera

angle.

[Setting Values: SB, RSL, EZ, SL2, EZ2, TV]

Camera Function Menu 113

Focus Function Settings

AF Assist

Focus Tracking

For specifying whether to track the focus during

zooming.

For specifying the behavior when the focus ring is

turned during AF.

On:

Tracks the focus during zooming.

Off:

Direction:

This option allows you to shift the auto focus

point to near and far directions by turning the

focus ring during AF.

Gives priority to the zoom speed and does not

track the focus during zooming.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Manual:

Memo :

Temporarily switches to MF when the focus ring

is turned during AF.

Zoom speed may be affected when zooming is

performed near the tele-end.

Off:

Sets the AF Assist function to “Off”.

Preset Zoom

[Setting Values: Direction, Manual, ROff]

For setting the speed for shifting to the preset zoom

position and the rate of change for starting and

stopping the preset zoom operation of the preset

zoom function assigned to the user button.

Memo :

This setting is effective only when the [FOCUS]

switch is set to “AUTO”.

Speed

AF Speed

For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom

For setting the AF operation speed.

position.

[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]

[Setting Values: 1 to 21 (R11)]

AF Sensitivity

Ease In

For specifying the sensitivity of AF in response to

changes in the photographic subject.

For setting the rate of change from the start of the

zoom operation until the predetermined [Speed] is

reached.

High: High sensitivity

Middle: Normal

The larger the setting value, the longer it takes to

reach the value specified in Speed.

[Setting Values: 1 to 5, ROff]

Low: Low sensitivity

[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]

Ease Out

AF Area

For setting the rate of change from the

predetermined [Speed] until the zoom operation

stops.

For configuring the AF area.

Multi:

Automatically configures to an area optimal for

The larger the setting value, the longer it takes

before the operation stops.

recording.

Wide:

[Setting Values: 1 to 5, ROff]

Extends the AF area sideways.

Normal:

REMOTE Zoom Ease

Performs AF at the area near the center of the

image.

For specifying whether to zoom in or zoom out

slowly when zoom operation starts or during

zooming using a wired remote control.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

[Setting Values: Multi, Wide, RNormal]

Web Zoom Ease

For specifying whether to zoom in or zoom out

slowly when zoom operation starts or during

zooming using the View Remote feature.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

114 Camera Function Menu

Face Detection Function Settings

Mode

MF Assist

For specifying the behavior when the focus ring is

turned during MF.

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the “Face

Detection” function in the Auto Focus mode.

Select the control to track results of face detection.

On:

Turning the focus ring during MF activates AF

for a short interval after the operation, after

which the camera recorder returns to the MF

mode. However, it does not function while in the

expanded focus mode.

AF&AE:

Sets auto focus and exposure control for the

face that is being tracked.

Off:

Does not switch temporarily to AF when the

focus ring is turned during MF.

AF:

Sets auto focus for the face that is being tracked.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]

Detection] )

Limitter

For specifying the closest focusing distance.

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Focus] is set

to “Meter”:

Memo :

When “AF&AE” is selected, this function will be

activated when the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU]

switch is set to “AUTO” and when at least one of

the Iris, Shutter and Gain items is configured to

Auto mode.

[Setting Values: 5 m - ∞, 3 m - ∞, 1 m - ∞, ROff]

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Focus] is

configured to “Feet”:

[Setting values: 16 ft - ∞, 10 ft - ∞, 3 ft - ∞, ROff]

When “AF” is specified, this function will be

activated only when the [FOCUS AUTO/

MANU] switch is set to “AUTO”.

AF Hold during Zoom

For specifying AF operation during zoom

operation.

Face Only AF

Hold:

For activating auto focusing only for the face of the

subject.

Constricts AF operation and performs silent

zooming during the zoom operation.

Off:

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Activates AF operation during zooming.

Memo :

[Setting Values: Hold, ROff]

When a face cannot be detected when this is

configured to “On”, the camera recorder

switches to manual focusing.

Sensitivity

For setting the level of ease of face detection.

[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]

Holding Duration

For specifying duration to maintain the current

focus when the camera loses track of the face.

Set to “Short” to select another object immediately

if the face on the screen is lost.

Set to “Long” to operate at the same position for

some time even if the face on the screen is lost.

[Setting Values: Long, RNormal, Short]

Camera Function Menu 115

User Switch Set Item

Lolux

To increase the sensitivity when in dim

USER1 to USER9, USER10 ▲, USER11 ▼,

USER12 ◀, USER13 ▶

surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “dB”:

Assigning one of the functions in the following

menu to the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2],

[ONLINE/3], [AE LOCK/4], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/

6], [USER7], [USER8] or [EXP.FOCUS/9] button or

the [▲/10], [▼/11], [◀/12] or [▶/13] front cross-

shaped button enables operation of the said

preconfigured function (on/off, launching,

switching).

[Setting Values: R36 dB, 30 dB]

When [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [Gain] is set

to “ISO”:

[Setting Values: RISO 51200, ISO 25600]

Clip Review

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the “Clip

Review” function.

Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable in

the Camera mode.

(A P170 [Adjusting the Gamma] )

Last 5sec:

Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the

[Setting Values: Cancel, Menu, Slot Select, Return

Video, Return over IP, Auto Upload, Live

Streaming, Load Picture File, Clip Review, OK

Mark, Clip Cutter Trig, Backup Trig, Rec, LCD

Backlight, Spot Meter, Focus Assist, Expanded

Focus, Focus Assist +, Marker, Histogram, Zebra,

AWB, White Balance, Preset Zoom3, Preset

Zoom2, Preset Zoom1, Digital Extender, OIS,

Black Compress, Black Stretch, Face Only AF,

Face Detection, AE Lock, Lolux, Bars, None]

ending.

Top 5sec:

Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the

beginning.

Clip:

Views the entire clip.

[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]

Spot Meter

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the “Spot Meter”

function.

Memo :

“Cancel” and “Menu” can only be assigned to

[USER7] or [USER8].

Max & Min:

“Rec” cannot be assigned to [FOCUS

ASSIST/1], [OIS/2] and [ONLINE/3].

“Focus Assist +” is a combination of the “Focus

Assist” and “Expanded Focus” functions.

The following functions can be assigned only for

GY-HC500SPCU.

Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the

image.

Max:

Displays the brightest area of the image.

Min:

Displays the darkest area of the image.

Manual:

[ODK Tagging]OFF, [ODK Tagging]KO, [ODK

Tagging]KOR, [ODK Tagging]P, [ODK

Tagging]PR, [ODK Tagging]FG, [ODK

Tagging]FGB, [ODK Tagging]REMOVE

Displays the image brightness at a specified

position.

[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]

Memo :

When “HLG” is selected in [Camera Process] B

[Color Space], the value of the spot meter

changes according to the setting of [LCD/VF] B

[Convert to ITU709]/[White Level].

116 Camera Function Menu

AE Lock

Expanded Focus

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the “AE Lock”

function.

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the “Expanded

Focus” function.

FAW:

Limited Time:

Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White

Balance) function to the value when the user

button assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.

AE:

Activates the timer.

Turns off the “Expanded Focus” function about

3 seconds after the user button assigned with

“Expanded Focus” is pressed.

Momentary:

Use this to fix the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or

Shutter to the value when the user button

assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.

AE/FAW:

The “Expanded Focus” function is enabled

during the interval while the user button

assigned with “Expanded Focus” is pressed.

Toggle:

Use this to fix the FAW (Full-time Auto White

Balance) function and the Auto function of Gain,

Iris, or Shutter to the value when the user button

assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed.

Pressing the user button assigned with

“Expanded Focus” each time switches the

“Expanded Focus” function to on or off.

[Setting Values: FAW, RAE, AE/FAW]

[Setting Values: Limited Time, Momentary,

Memo :

RToggle]

This feature only works when Iris, Shutter, Gain

Memo :

or White Balance is set to Auto mode.

When one of the [J/10], [K/11], [H/12], [I/13]

buttons is assigned with “Expanded Focus” and

“Toggle” is selected, press the [CANCEL] button

to turn off the function.

“AE Lock” is canceled when the user button

assigned with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any

of the functions that can be locked is operated

regardless of the mode (Manual or Auto).

“AE Lock” is canceled in the following cases.

When the user button that is assigned with

“AE Lock” is pressed

When changes are made to the iris, gain or

shutter settings

When changes are made to the AE level

When there is a switch between the Camera

and Media modes

Camera Function Menu 117

Colorimetry

Camera Process Menu

For configuring the standard for converting R, G, B

signals to Y, Cb, Cr signals when [Color Space] is

configured to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.

Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera

images.

ITU2020:

This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.

Records and outputs ITU2020 RGB signals

using the Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.

ITU709:

Color Space

For configuring the color space that is used inside

the camera.

Records and outputs ITU709 RGB signals using

the Y-Cb-Cr signal conversion coefficient.

The gamma and color gamut change automatically

according to the selected color space.

When [System] is configured to a setting other than

“SD”

[Setting Values: RITU2020, ITU709]

Memo :

This item is available when [Color Space] is set

to “HLG” or “ITU2020”.

J-Log1:

This is fixed at “ITU709” when [Color Space] is

set to “J-Log1” or “ITU709”.

Color space that supports 800% dynamic range

and log gamma

HLG:

This is fixed at “ITU601” when [System] is set to

“SD”.

Color space that supports the ITU2100 HLG

HDR

ITU2020:

Gamma

Color space that supports the ITU2020 wide

color gamut

For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the

gradation expression.

ITU709:

ITU709 color space

[Setting Values: J-Log1, HLG, ITU2020, RITU709]

Cinema 2:

When [System] is set to “SD”

Sets to a gamma curve with soft expression

giving priority to high luminance gradation.

Cinema 1:

ITU601 (EBU):

Color space that supports the EBU color gamut

ITU601 (170M):

Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to

the screen characteristics of movies.

Standard:

Color space that supports the SMPTE170M

color gamut

ITU709:

Sets to a standard gamma curve.

ITU709 color space

[Setting Values: Cinema 2, Cinema 1, RStandard]

Memo :

[Setting Values: ITU601 (EBU), ITU601 (170M),

RITU709]

[Gamma] cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”. “HLG

Gamma” is used during “HLG” and “J-Log1

Gamma” is used during “J-Log1”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Memo :

When [System] is configured to a setting other

than “SD” and “J-Log1” or “HLG” is selected,

some menu items under [Camera Process]

cannot be configured.

The AE function does not function when “J-

Log1” or “HLG” is selected.

118 Camera Process Menu

Level

Frequency

The amount of correction can be specified

separately when [Gamma] is set to “Standard”,

“Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”.

For specifying the correction frequency of the

contour. Set this according to the object.

High:

Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this

when shooting objects with fine patterns.

Middle:

When [Gamma] is set to “Standard”

[Setting Values: 0.35 to R 0.45 to 0.55 (in steps of

0.02)]

Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.

Low:

Increase the number:

Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser

gradation at dark areas.

Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this

when shooting objects with large patterns.

Decrease the number:

[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]

Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser

gradation at bright areas.

Memo :

When [Gamma] is set to “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2”

Available when [System] is set to “4K EXT

(SSD)” or “4K”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

[Setting Values: +5 to R 0 to -5]

Increase the number:

Finer gradation at dark areas and coarser

gradation at bright areas.

Decrease the number:

Master Black

Finer gradation at bright areas and coarser

gradation at dark areas.

For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that

serves as the reference black.

Memo :

Increasing the value increases the pedestal.

[Setting Values: +50 to -50 (R-3)]

When [Gamma] is set to “Standard” with the

value set at [0.45], the gamma adjusted

conforms to ITU709 or ITU2020.

Memo :

If [Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”, the maximum

peak signal decreases from 109% as the

number becomes smaller in the setting values

from 0 to -5. When the level is at -5, the video

input with a dynamic range of 400% will be kept

within a 100% output.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1”.

The setting value of this item is stored separately

when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is configured to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Detail

For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement

level.

Increasing the value increases the sharpness of

the contour.

[Setting Values: +10 to -10, Off]

(Default Value: -6 for “J-Log1” and “HLG” of Color

Space; 0 for all other settings)

Memo :

The setting values of this item and [Adjust...] are

stored separately when [Color Space] is set to

“HLG” or “J-Log1”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Camera Process Menu 119

Black Toe

Compress Level

Compression amount increases when a larger

Process the dark areas according to the balance of

bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the

overall balance of contrast.

value is specified.

[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]

Memo :

For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item

according to the condition of the captured video

signals.

This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is

set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears

as “---” and cannot be selected.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Stretch:

Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to

stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby

showing the contrast between bright and dark

areas more clearly.

Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch

Level].

Normal:

Knee

Normal condition.

For specifying the “Knee” operation, which

compresses video signals beyond a certain level to

show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To

check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”

and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee

operation) manually.

Compress:

Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase

the contrast when the entire image appears

bright and contrast is weak. Specify the

compression amount with [Compress Level].

[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]

Manual:

Memo :

Enables manual adjustment of knee point using

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

[Level].

Auto:

Adjusts the knee point automatically according

to the luminance level.

[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]

Stretch Level

Memo :

Stretch amount increases when a larger value is

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when

[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

specified.

[Setting Values: 5 to 1 (R 3)]

Memo :

This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is

set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as

“---” and cannot be selected.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Level

For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee

compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual”.

[Setting Values: 100.0%, 97.5%, R95.0%, 92.5%,

90.0%, 87.5%, 85.0%, 82.5%, 80.0%, 77.5%,

75.0%, 72.5%, 70.0%]

Memo :

This item cannot be configured when [Knee] is

set to “Auto”.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when

[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

120 Camera Process Menu

Sensitivity

White Clip

For setting the response speed of the “Knee”

operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.

Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a

condition where there is drastic change in the light

intensity.

For setting the point to apply white clip for video

signals with a high luminance level.

109%:

Applies white clip at the point where the

luminance level is 109%.

103%:

[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]

Applies white clip at the point where the

luminance level is 103 %.

100%:

Memo :

This item cannot be configured when [Knee] is

set to “Manual”.

Applies white clip at the point where the

luminance level is 100 %. Set to this value when

the system in use limits Y output signals within

100 %.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when

[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.

[Setting Values: R109%, 103%, 100%]

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Memo :

The setting value of this item is stored separately

when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Peak Filter

For configuring the response speed of the “Knee”

operation with respect to a high-luminance point

light source and the like when [Knee] is configured

to “Auto”.

[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low]

Memo :

White Balance...

Menu for adjusting white balance.

(A P123 [White Balance Item] )

This item cannot be configured when [Knee] is

set to “Manual”.

For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White

Balance] (A P 69)”.

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and when

[Gamma] is set to “Cinema 2”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Camera Process Menu 121

Color Matrix

Color Gain

For setting the color matrix.

For adjusting the video signal color level.

Increasing the value deepens the color.

[Setting Values: +15 to -50, Off (R0)]

Natural:

Sets to a brighter and more natural color matrix

than the standard. Effective for shooting under

a strong single color light source such as stage

lightings.

Memo :

Images are displayed in black-and-white when

this is set to “Off”.

Cinema Subdued:

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1”.

The setting value of this item is stored separately

when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to

the screen characteristics of movies.

Cinema Vivid:

Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the

screen characteristics of movies.

Standard:

Sets to a standard color matrix.

Off:

Reverse Picture

Sets the color matrix function to Off.

[Setting Values: Natural, Cinema Subdued,

For recording images correctly by setting this item

to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside

down or laterally inverted.

Cinema Vivid, RStandard, Off]

Memo :

Rotate:

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the

image.

Off:

Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the

image.

Adjust

[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]

This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color

Reset Process

according to the user’s preference.

The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,

“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color

Matrix] can be stored individually.

Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu

to their default settings.

The saturation and hue of Red, Green and Blue

can be configured individually.

[Setting range for Saturation: -10 to +10] (roughly

± 10%)

[Setting range for Hue: -10 to +10]

(A P171 [Adjusting Color Matrix] )

Memo :

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1”.

This item cannot be selected when [Color

Matrix] is set to “Off”.

This item cannot be configured when [Infrared]

is set to “On”.

122 Camera Process Menu

White Balance Item

Preset Temp.

AWB Paint

For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the

AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.

For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]

(A P 69)”.

For setting the color temperature when the [WHT

BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”.

For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]

(A P 69)”.

Increase the number:

Strengthens the red/blue.

Decrease the number:

Weakens the red/blue.

Alternative Temp.

[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]

For setting the alternative color temperature in the

Preset mode.

Memo :

This item is selectable when the [WHT BAL]

switch is set to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set,

this item appears as “---” and cannot be

selected.

When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”,

pressing the [y] or the user button assigned with

the “AWB” function each time switches the color

temperature setting in the Preset mode. ([Preset

Temp.]1[Alternative Temp.])

Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.

When [Clear Paint After AWB] is configured to

“On”, pressing the [y] button or the user button

assigned with the “AWB” function to readjust the

white balance switches the R and B values to

“0”.

For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White Balance]

(A P 69)”.

Preset Paint Memory

For configuring whether to configure the color

temperature individually or collectively in the

Preset mode. Adjustment is performed in [Preset

Paint].

Clear Paint After AWB

For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R

value and B value) settings after executing AWB

(Auto White Balance).

Individual:

Each of the 9 types of color temperatures

(2300K, 3000K, 3200K, 4200K, 4800K, 5200K,

5600K, 6500K, 7500K) are configured

individually.

On:

Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)

settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White

Balance).

Common:

The entire color temperature range is configured

collectively.

Off:

Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and

B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto

White Balance).

[Setting Values: Individual, RCommon]

Preset Paint

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

For adjusting the R (red) and (B) blue components

in the Preset mode.

FAW Paint

Increase the number:

Strengthens the red/blue.

Decrease the number:

Weakens the red/blue.

For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component

during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.

Increase the number:

Strengthens the red/blue.

Decrease the number:

Weakens the red/blue.

[Setting Values: +32 to -32 (R 0)]

[Setting Values: -32 to +32 (R 0)]

Camera Process Menu 123

UB Mode

TC/UB Menu

Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.

This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,

or during recording.

For setting the recording mode of the user’s bit.

Date:

Records the date.

Time:

Records the time.

Preset:

TC Generator

Records according to the preset setting.

(A P80 [Setting the User’s Bit] )

For setting the operation of the time code.

Free Run(GPS)L:

[Setting Values: Date, Time, RPreset]

Timecodeinformationcanbesynchronizedwith

the date/time information acquired from the

GPS.

Memo :

If [UB Mode] is set to “Time”, the user’s bit

operates in the 24-hour format even if the LCD

display is in the 12-hour format.

Free Run(Ext):

External time code input will be synchronized

with this and the time code will be recorded.

Free Run:

Preset

The time code operates in the run mode at all

times regardless of the recording status. It

continues to run even when the power of the

camera recorder is turned off.

For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)

Display AB CD EF 01

(A P80 [Presetting the User’s Bit] )

Memo :

Rec Run:

When [UB Mode] is set to “Date” or “Time”, this

item appears as “---” and preset is disabled.

When [TC Generator] is set to “Regen”, this item

appears as “<Regen>” and preset is disabled.

The time code operates in the run mode during

recording. It continues to run in the order of the

recorded clips as long as the SD card is not

replaced. If the SD card is removed and

recording is made on another card, time code

will be recorded on the new card from where it

was left off in the previous card.

Drop Frame

Regen:

For setting the framing mode of the time code

generator.

The time code operates in the run mode during

recording. When the SD card is replaced, the

last time code recorded on the card is read and

recorded on a new card so that the time code

continues in running order.

Non Drop:

Internal time code generator works in the non-

drop-frame mode. Use this setting when placing

emphasis on the number of frames.

Drop:

[Setting Values: Free Run(GPS), L, Free

Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec Run, Regen]

Internal time code generator works in the drop-

frame mode. Use this setting when placing

emphasis on the recording time.

Memo :

When [Rec Mode] is configured to “Interval

Rec” or “Frame Rec”, only “Rec Run” and

“Regen” are selectable.

When [System] is configured to “High-Speed”,

only “Rec Run” and “Regen” are selectable.

When [Frame Rate] is set to “24p”, “Free

Run(GPS)” cannot be selected.

[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]

Memo :

This item can be set only when [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFrame

Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or “60i”.

However, when “Free Run(GPS)” is selected for

[TC Generator], this item is fixed at “Drop” and

cannot be selected. L

TC Preset

When [Frame Rate] is “24p”, “Non Drop”

becomes fixed and cannot be selected.

When [Frame Rate] is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this

item appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

(A P77 [Setting Time Code Generator] )

For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,

frame).

Display

Drop setting 02:02:25.20

Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20

124 TC/UB Menu

LCD Contrast

LCD/VF Menu

For setting the difference in luminance between the

darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.

Increasing the value increases the contrast.

[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]

Item for specifying settings related to the LCD

monitor or viewfinder screen.

This menu screen can be used to specify settings

related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern

display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In

addition, it is also used for selecting whether to

display characters on the LCD monitor or

viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the

picture quality of the LCD monitor.

LCD Backlight

For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor

backlight.

Increasing the value increases the brightness.

[Setting Values: +1, R 0, -1]

Shooting Assist...

LCD Mirror

Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.

For specifying the image display method when

facing the LCD monitor.

(A P126 [Shooting Assist Item] )

Select “Mirror” to display the image after laterally

inverting it. (Mirror display)

Marker Settings...

(A P127 [Marker Settings Item] )

For setting items such as the safety zone and

center mark.

[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]

Memo :

Display Type...

The setting of this item is valid only in Camera

mode.

For specifying display-related settings.

During color bar, expanded focus, menu screen

and status screen display, the “Mirror” setting is

disabled.

(A P128 [Display Type Item] )

Display On/Off...

(A P169 [Color Bar Output] )

For configuring the on/off setting of the screen

display.

Convert to ITU709

(A P129 [Display On/Off Item] )

When [Color Space] is set to “ITU2020”, “J-Log1”

or “HLG”, the video images on the LCD monitor and

viewfinder are converted to the ITU709 color space

for display.

VF Color

For selecting whether to display the image on the

viewfinder screen in color or black-and-white.

Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display

in black-and-white.

Cam + Return:

The camera and return videos are converted

from the color space configured in [Color

Space] to the ITU709 color space.

Cam:

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

VF Bright

Only the camera video is converted to the

ITU709 color space.

For setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.

Increasing the value increases the brightness.

[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]

Off:

Not converted.

VF Contrast

[Setting Values: Cam + Return, Cam, ROff]

Memo :

For setting the difference in luminance between the

darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder

screen.

This item can be configured only when [Color

Space] is set to “ITU2020”, “J-Log1” or “HLG”.

Increasing the value increases the contrast.

[Setting Values: +10 to +1, R0, -1 to -10]

LCD/VF Menu 125

Shooting Assist Item

Focus Assist

White Level

For configuring the white level during adjustment of

the dynamic range that is visible in the LCD monitor

or viewfinder when [Color Space] is set to “HLG”.

When [Color Space] is set to “HLG” and [Convert

to ITU709] is set to a value other than “Off”, this item

can be used to configure the output luminance level

(%) of HLG videos that corresponds to 100% on

the ITU709 gamma curve during the conversion.

[Setting Values: 80.0%, 77.5%, 75.0%, R 72.5%,

70.0%, 67.5%,65.0%, 62.5%, 60.0%, 57.5%,

55.0%, 52.5%, 50.0%]

For setting whether to add color to the contour of

the focused image upon switching the image to

black-and-white.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Type

For configuring the behavior when operating the

user button that is assigned with the [Focus

Assist] function.

(A P61 [Focus Assist Function] )

Memo :

ACCU-Focus:

This item can be configured only when [Color

Space] is set to “HLG”.

The value on the spot meter changes in tandem

with this setting.

Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU-Focus

(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the

object becomes shallower to enable easier

focusing. The ACCU-Focus function switches

automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.

Normal:

Example: When [White Level] is set to “75.0%”,

the point at which the HLG output is 75% is

displayed as 100% on the spot meter.

Refer to [Tone Mapping Characteristics for

Converting HLG to ITU709 for LCD/VF]

(A P 245) for each characteristic. Conversion

to the ITU709 color space is performed with

gamma and knee adjusted such that the

maximum HDR dynamic range is visible during

the conversion.

Enables only the Focus Assist function. The

focused area is displayed in color to enable

easier focusing. Display color can be specified

with [Color].

[Setting Values: ACCU-Focus, RNormal]

Color

For setting the display color of the focused area

when Focus Assist is activated.

LCD RGB Gain

[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]

For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)

gain level of the LCD monitor.

Zebra

For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at

the bright areas of the subject.

Select “On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to

hide.

[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]

Reset

Restores [LCD RGB Gain] to the default settings.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

VF RGB Gain

Detect

For adjusting the R (red), G (green) and B (blue)

gain level of the viewfinder.

For configuring the timing to detect the zebra

pattern display.

[Setting Values: +127 to R 0 to -128]

Converted ITU709:

Performs detection after converting to the

ITU709 color space.

Reset

Restores [VF RGB Gain] to the default settings.

HLG/J-Log1:

Performs detection before converting to the

ITU709 color space.

[Setting Values: Converted ITU709, RHLG/J-

Log1]

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Color

Space] is set to “J-Log1” or “HLG” and [Convert

to ITU709] is set to “Cam” or “Cam + Return”.

126 LCD/VF Menu

Top

Histogram Bottom

For setting the maximum luminance level for the

For selecting the minimum brightness limit for

changing the histogram display color.

[Setting Values: 0% to 105% (in 5% increments)]

(R 20%)

zebra pattern display.

[Setting Values: Over, 100%, 98%, 95% to 5% (in

5% increments)] (R80%)

When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”

Bottom

[Setting Values: -6F-stop, -5F-stop, -4F-stop,

R-3F-stop(2%), -2F-stop, -1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%),

⅓ F-stop, ⅔ F-stop, 1F-stop, 1 ⅓ F-stop, 1 ⅔ F-

stop, 2F-stop, 2 ⅓ F-stop(90%), 2 ⅔ F-stop, 3F-

stop, 3 ⅓ F-stop, 3 ⅔ F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 ⅓ F-stop,

4 ⅔ F-stop, 5F-stop, 5 ⅓ F-stop]

For setting the minimum luminance level for the

zebra pattern display.

[Setting Values: 100%, 98%, 95% to 0% (in 5%

increments)] (R70%)

Memo :

The relation between Top and Bottom is such

that Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this

relation during setting, the setting value is

automatically corrected.

Memo :

When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green

line appears which corresponds to the “0F-

stop(18%)” portion of the subject with 18%

reflectance.

Peaking Frequency

For setting the frequency bandwidth for

emphasizing the outline using the [PEAKING]

button.

Marker Settings Item

For setting the marker and safety zone, which are

useful in helping you determine the angle of view

for the image according to the shooting purpose.

(A P169 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays

(Camera Mode Only)] )

[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]

Histogram

For setting whether to display the histogram, which

shows the distribution of different points with

different levels of brightness in an image.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,

the markers do not appear regardless of the

setting.

Histogram Top

For selecting the maximum brightness limit for

changing the histogram display color.

[Setting Values: 5% to 110% (in 5% increments)]

(R 80%)

Marker

For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,

and center marks on the screen.

When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

[Setting Values: -5F-stop, -4F-stop, -3F-stop(2%),

-2F-stop, -1F-stop, 0F-stop(18%), ⅓F-stop, ⅔F-

stop, 1F-stop, 1⅓F-stop, 1⅔F-stop, 2F-stop, 2 ⅓

F-stop(90%), 2 ⅔ F-stop, R3F-stop, 3 ⅓ F-stop, 3

⅔ F-stop, 4F-stop, 4 ⅓ F-stop, 4 ⅔ F-stop, 5F-

stop, 5 ⅓ F-stop, 5½F-stop]

Grid Marker

For setting whether to display a 3x3 grid on the

screen.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect

Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do

not function.

When [Color Space] is set to “J-Log1”, a green

line appears which corresponds to the “0F-

stop(18%)” portion of the subject with 18%

reflectance.

LCD/VF Menu 127

Display Type Item

Aspect Ratio

For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used

This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD

from the overall angle of view.

monitor and viewfinder screen.

[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1 Top, 2.35:1

Center, 1.85:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, R16:9, 1.75:1,

1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3]

Battery

For setting the display of the remaining battery

power on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

Memo :

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item

is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.

(A P152 [ SD Aspect ] )

Time:

Displays the remaining battery power in

minutes. (min)

Capacity%:

Displays the remaining battery power in

percentage. (%)

Aspect Marker

Voltage:

For specifying how boundary markers are to be

used to indicate the parts of an image that are

beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in

[Aspect Ratio].

Displays the current battery voltage in units of

0.1 V. (V)

[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage]

Memo :

Line+Halftone:

The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,

“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes according to

Displays the boundary using lines, and areas

outside the boundary in halftone.

Halftone:

the remaining battery power.

In addition, the plug mark is added during charging.

Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.

Line:

4 S

D R

C Q

B P

10 % and below

11 % to 30 %

31% to 70 %

Displays the boundary using lines.

Off:

Hides the boundary markers.

71 % to 100 %

[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,

When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”

ROff]

instead of the value is displayed.

Replace the battery as soon as possible.

The remaining battery power and remaining time are

intended as reference values for the shooting

duration.

Memo :

When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or

“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot

be selected.

The time, capacity or voltage will not be displayed

during charging.

Safety Zone

For setting the percentage of area that is to be

deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the

boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect

Ratio].

TC/UB

For specifying whether to display the time code

(TC) or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD

monitor and viewfinder screen.

[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]

[Setting Values: UB, RTC]

Center Mark

Zoom

For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate

the screen center within the aspect ratio selected

in [Aspect Ratio].

For setting the display method of the zoom

position.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Number:

Displays the zoom position in numbers.

Bar:

Displays the zoom position in a bar.

[Setting Values: Number, RBar]

128 LCD/VF Menu

Focus

Gain

For setting the display method of the approximate

distance to the subject in focus.

For setting the gain display to be displayed on the

LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

Feet:

ISO:

Displays the distance in feet.

Meter:

Displays the gain as ISO sensitivity.

dB:

Displays the distance in meters.

Displays the gain in dB (decibel).

[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter]

[Setting Values: ISO, RdB]

Memo :

ND Filter

This item cannot be configured when [Color

Space] is set to “HLG”.

For specifying how the filter position is to be

displayed.

Normal + Assist:

Displays the current filter position.

If the ND filter setting is inappropriate, the

appropriate ND filter to select will appear

blinking.

Display On/Off Item

For setting whether to turn on or off the display of

an item on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

Normal:

Battery, Clip Info, High-Speed, Media Status,

Rec Trigger, TC/UB, Media Remain, Record

Format, Video Format, Guide, GPS A L,

Return over IP, Live Streaming, Network,

Date, Time, Operation Lock, Zoom, Focus,

Zebra, Focus Assist, Color Space, Black Toe,

ND Filter, OIS, Face Detection, Infrared, AE

Level, Iris, Shutter, Gain, White Balance,

Audio Meter, Position Bar, Camera

Displays the current filter position.

[Setting Values: Normal + Assist, RNormal]

Shutter

For setting the shutter display to be displayed on

the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.

DEG:

Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the

same way as film cameras.

SEC:

Angle[Tagging]L, ODK[Tagging]L

Displays the shutter speed in seconds.

For configuring whether to display or hide an item.

[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Memo :

“DEG” is selectable only when [WFrame Rate]

is set to “24p” or “25p”.

This may not be selectable depending on the

operating mode and status.

When [WFrame Rate] is set to other values, the

shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and

cannot be selected.

(A P130 [Video Set Item] )

LCD/VF Menu 129

3G-SDI Mapping

A/V Set Menu

Menu screen for video output and audio.

For configuring the mode of mapping for signals

output from the [SDI OUT] terminal.

[Setting Values: Level B, RLevel A]

Video Set...

Memo :

SDI output is configurable only when the setting

For specifying video output-related settings.

is set to “1080p”.

When [SDI OUT] is configured to “Off”, this item

cannot be configured.

Audio Set...

For specifying audio-related settings.

Rec Trigger

(A P132 [Audio Set Item] )

For configuring whether to superimpose trigger

signals on the [SDI OUT] terminal in tandem with

the [REC] button.

Video Set Item

SDI OUT

If “Type-A” or “Type-B” is specified, it is possible to

recordonadeviceequippedwithSDIrecordtrigger

in tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.

When a compatible device is connected,

recording/stop control signals are output in tandem

with the operation of the [REC] button.

The record trigger output status to the connected

device is indicated by REC B /STBY B on the

display screen.

For configuring video output from the [SDI OUT]

terminal.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

When a resolution with no SDI output is

selected, the setting is fixed at “Off”.

When “4K EXT (SSD)” is selected for the

[System] item, video images are not output from

the [SDI OUT] terminal.

[Setting Values: Type-A, Type-B, ROff]

Memo :

If “Type-A” does not work, it may operate in the

“Type-B” setting, but the user’s bit to the

connected device will not be correctly output.

Even if REC B /STBY B is displayed on the

display screen, the compatible device may not

necessarily be recording.

Character

For configuring whether to show the display and

menu on the [SDI OUT] terminal.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Resolution

This item can be configured when [SDI OUT] is

configured to “On” and [Rec Mode] is configured

to “Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip Continuous”.

Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does

not support record trigger.

For selecting the resolution of video output from the

[SDI OUT] terminal according to the monitor to be

connected.

[Setting Values: 1080psF, R1080p, 1080i, 720p,

576i, 480i, 480i (2:3pd)]

Memo :

The selectable options vary according to the

[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B

[System]/[WResolution] setting.

Cross conversion output is not possible.

When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT] B

[Resolution] is set to “1080p”, configuring

[System] B [GPS] to “On” changes the setting to

“1080i”. A L

130 A/V Set Menu

HDMI OUT

Colorimetry

For configuring the colorimetry of the HDMI signal

when [Camera Process] B [Color Space] B

[Colorimetry] is set to “ITU2020”.

For configuring video output from the [HDMI]

terminal.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

ITU2020:

Memo :

Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU2020

Monitor and menu displays are not output from

regardless of the device that is connected via

the [HDMI] terminal.

HDMI.

ITU709:

Resolution

Outputs using the colorimetry of ITU709

regardless of the device that is connected via

For selecting the resolution of video output from the

[HDMI] terminal according to the monitor to be

connected.

HDMI.

Auto:

Switches the colorimetry automatically

according to the device that is connected via

HDMI.

[Setting Values: 2160/60p, 2160/50p, 2160/30p,

2160/25p, 2160/24p, 1080/60p, 1080/50p,

1080/30p, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080p, R1080i,

720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i, 480p(2:3pd)]

[Setting Values: ITU2020, ITU709, RAuto]

Memo :

This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]

is set to a setting other than “Off”.

The selectable options vary according to the

settings in [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] and [WResolution]/

[GResolution].

This item can be configured when [HDMI

Color] is set to “Auto”.

Cross conversion output is not possible.

When in the Camera mode, selecting “SD” for

[System] B [Record Set] B [Record Format] B

[System] fixes the resolution at “480p” or “576p”.

This item cannot be configured when [Camera

Process] B [Color Space] B [Colorimetry] is set

to a setting other than “ITU2020”.

Enhance

Color

For setting the color range of HDMI signals. When

connecting to a PC monitor, set this to “On”.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

For setting the color format of HDMI signals.

[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]

Memo :

This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]

is set to a setting other than “Off”.

This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]

is set to a setting other than “Off”.

A/V Set Menu 131

Audio Set Item

Input1 Mic Ref.

Rec Trigger

For configuring whether to superimpose trigger

signals on the [HDMI] out terminal in tandem with

the [REC] button.

For setting the reference input level when the

[INPUT1] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC

+48V”.

[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,

-38dB, -32dB]

If “On” is specified, it is possible to record on a

device equipped with HDMI record trigger in

tandem with the operation of the [REC] button.

When a compatible device is connected,

recording/stop control signals are output in tandem

with the operation of the [REC] button.

The HDMI record trigger output status to the

connected device is indicated by REC B/STBY B

on the display screen.

Input2 Mic Ref.

For setting the reference input level when the

[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC

+48V”.

[Setting Values: -62dB, -56dB, R-50dB, -44dB,

-38dB, -32dB]

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

Even if REC B/STBY B is displayed on the

display screen, the compatible device may not

necessarily be recording.

Int. Mic Gain

Forsettingthesensitivityofthebuilt-inmicrophone.

This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]

is set to a value other than “Off”, and [Rec

Mode] is set to “Normal”, “Pre Rec” or “Clip

Continuous”.

[Setting Values: 12 dB, 6 dB, R0dB]

AUX Gain

For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal

input.

Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does

not support record trigger.

[Setting Values: 12 dB, 6 dB, R0dB]

Ref. Level

For setting whether to superimpose time code to

For setting the recording reference level. (Applies

to both [CH1/CH2].)

[Setting Values: -12dB, -18dB, R-20dB]

the [HDMI] terminal.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

This item can be configured when [HDMI OUT]

is set to a setting other than “Off”.

Set to “Off” if connecting to a device that does

not support HDMI TC.

Limiter

For setting the limiter operation.

-9dBFS:

Sets “-9dBFS” to the maximum recording level.

-6dBFS:

Sets “-6dBFS” to the maximum recording level.

Off:

Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2

AUTO/MANUAL] selection switches, the

operation may be different as described below.

The limiter does not function when

“MANUAL” is set.

The limiter functions at -6dBFS when “AUTO”

is set.

[Setting Values: -9dBFS, R-6dBFS, Off]

132 A/V Set Menu

AGC Response

Int. Mic Separation

For setting the enhancement level of the stereo

effect of the built-in microphone.

Attack Time

Sets the time to activate the limiter.

On:

[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]

Enhances the stereo effect.

Off:

Decay Time

Does not enhance the stereo effect.

Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]

Memo :

AGC Mode

Both [CH1] and [CH2] selection switches are set

to “INT”.

For setting whether to link the limiter operation of

[CH1] and [CH2].

Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.

[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]

When [Int. Mic Separation] is set to “On”, a

icon is displayed on the status screen (audio

input) while the function is operating.

Memo :

Test Tone

Enabled only when both the [AUX] input terminal

and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to

“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2

AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.

For specifying whether to output the audio test

signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

INPUT1/2 Wind Cut

XLR Manual Level

For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of

theaudioinputsignals(low-cut)whenthe [INPUT1/

INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.

Set this item to reduce wind noise from the

microphone.

For setting whether to link manual audio

adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and

[INPUT2] terminals.

Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.

When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording

level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment

knob.

Both:

Enables low-cut on both the [INPUT1] and

[INPUT2] terminals.

[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]

Memo :

INPUT2:

Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT2]

Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]

input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and

both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/

MANUAL] selection switches are set to

“MANUAL”.

When this item is set to “Link”, [CH2] recording

level adjustment knob is disabled.

terminal only.

INPUT1:

Enables low-cut on the audio of the [INPUT1]

terminal only.

Off:

Disables low-cut.

[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]

Int. Mic Wind Cut

For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of

the audio input signals (low-cut) from the built-in

microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind

noise from the microphone.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

A/V Set Menu 133

Equalizer

IFB/RET Monitor...

You can correct the characteristic and enhance the

sound of the connected microphone using this

equalizer setting.

CH1(/2)

For configuring the output from the [x] terminal

during IFB Return over IP of each channel.

For setting the audio frequency from a 5-band

equalizer.

Auto:

Outputs upon mixing the IFB/Return over IP

audio with the microphone audio when IFB/

Return over IP audio input is detected. Outputs

only the microphone audio when IFB/Return

over IP audio input is not detected.

IFB/RET Only:

Frequency:

100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz

Variable level:

± 6dB (1dB step)

Memo :

Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set

Outputs only the IFB/Return over IP audio at all

times.

in the equalizer.

Set all bands to “0 dB” to bypass the equalizer.

When the equalizer level is set to the + side, the

audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the

recording level in Manual mode.

Off:

IFB/Return over IP audio is not output.

[Setting Values: RAuto, IFB/RET Only, Off]

Memo :

If the values of multiple frequencies are

changed, the specified levels and the actual

levels may be different due to interference

between the frequency bands.

To enable different settings for CH1 and CH2 of

[IFB/RET Monitor], set [Monitor] to “Stereo”.

Alarm Level

This function is enabled only when both

[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are

set to “Off”.

For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone

as well as setting the volume.

The warning tone is output from the monitor

speaker or [x] terminal.

Monitor

[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]

For setting the audio sound of the [x] terminal to

stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]

selection switch on the LCD monitor is set to

“BOTH”.

Audio On FULL AUTO

For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when

the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”.

Mix:

Auto:

Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and

CH2) to both L and R.

Sets audio recording mode to the auto mode.

SW Set:

Stereo:

Sets the audio recording mode following the

[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch

setting.

Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of

CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).

[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]

[Setting Values: RAuto, SW Set]

Memo :

If both CH1 and CH2 are built-in microphones,

stereo sound is output from the [x] terminal

regardless of the [Monitor] setting.

134 A/V Set Menu

Return over IP...

Network Menu

For specifying network-related settings.

The display of the software keyboard for input

varies according to the item you are setting.

For configuring settings related to Return over IP.

This function allows video and audio to be received

via the network.

(A P139 [Return over IP Item] )

Memo :

Connection Setup...

Users cannot access this menu in the following

cases.

For configuring the network connection settings.

A [Wizard] screen will appear according to the

mode of connection. Follow the instructions to

perform the setting.

When [Record Format] B [System] is set to a

setting other than “HD” or “SD”

When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set

The preconfigured settings can be loaded, saved

or deleted.

to “24p”

When [Overlay Settings] B [Overlay

(A P136 [Connection Setup Item] )

Function] is set to “Enable”A L

Memo :

When [Record Set] B [Time Stamp] is set to

Users cannot access this menu in the following

“On”

cases.

During manual FTP transfer

Web...

During live streaming

Return over IP in Progress

For setting the functions that make use of the web

browser.

(A P141 [Web Item] )

Live Streaming...

For configuring settings for distributing live video

images and audio.

Metadata Server...

For registering the FTP server for importing the

metadata and the path of the file to be imported.

Up to 4 settings can be registered.

(A P142 [Metadata Server Item] )

Memo :

Users cannot access this menu in the following

cases.

When [Record Format] B [System] is set to a

Upload Settings...

setting other than “HD” or “SD”

For configuring the method for uploading to the

FTP server as well as the server and directory for

uploading the clip recorded in the media to the FTP

server.

During FTP transfer

When [Record Format] B [Frame Rate] is set

to “24p”

(A P142 [Upload Settings Item] )

Import Metadata

For importing metadata from the FTP server.

Metadata loaded by the setup files (“User File”/

“All File”) will be deleted.

(A P180 [Importing Metadata] )

Memo :

This option is not selectable if the network

connection is not established.

This option is not selectable while using the

network.

Network Menu 135

Zero Config

Setup File

For allowing this camera recorder to be detected

automatically by external devices (such as

switchers) connected to the same LAN.

Connection can be established via one link from

the menu of the external device.

Load

Loads the settings on the [Wizard] screen.

(A P202 [Reading the Connection Settings

File] )

Memo :

Store

The Zero Config function is not equipped with

the function to change the settings of the camera

recorder.

Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.

(A P201 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )

Delete

Announcement

Deletes the saved settings.

For configuring the method of connection from an

external device during automatic detection of this

camera recorder.

(A P203 [Deleting Connection Settings] )

FTP Proxy...

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

For setting the FTP proxy.

Hostname Prefix

Type

Part of the host name can be changed.

It will appear in the format of “XXXX-YYYY.local”

on the Status screen (network).

Select the type of FTP proxy.

[Setting Values: RNo Proxy, HTTP]

XXXX : Character string (maximum 8 characters)

configured in [Hostname Prefix]

Server

Set the FTP proxy server name.

Memo :

YYYY : Serial number of this camera recorder

Memo :

Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.

You can enter characters not more than 127

bytes using single-byte alphanumeric

characters (a to z, 0 to 9), single-byte hyphen

(“-”) or dot (“.”).

When [Announcement] is configured to “Off”,

this item does not appear on the status screen

(Connection Setup).

When [Type] is set to “No Proxy”, changes

cannot be made.

Reset Network

Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their

default settings.

Port

Set the FTP proxy port number.

Memo :

Connection Setup Item

Wizard

Enter the name using the onscreen keyboard.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535.

Displays a [Wizard] screen for connecting to the

network.

APN

Follow the instructions on the screen.

For specifying APN (Access Point Name).

This item is grayed out and cannot be selected

if APN cannot be set for the adapter attached.

Caution :

The APN setting is written into the cellular

adapter, not this camera recorder.

Setting a wrong APN may result in

communication failure or expensive bills from

the telecommunications company. Set the APN

correctly.

(A P180 [Cellular adapter connection (“USB”-

“Cellular”)] )

136 Network Menu

Live Streaming Item

Live Streaming

Server

For selecting the server for live streaming.

[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,

Server4]

Starts live distribution when “On” is selected.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).

“On” cannot be selected if streaming is not

possible with the selected resolution, frame rate

and bitrate combination.

Streaming Server

“On” cannot be selected if connection of the

selected network is not established.

“On” cannot be selected when FTP is running.

Live streaming switches to “Off” when the power

is turned off.

For setting the server for live streaming.

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).

Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4

Auto Restart

The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed

individually.

Alias

When the network is reconnected after

disconnection, live streaming will resume

automatically.

On:

For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this

Once the network is reconnected, live streaming

resumes automatically.

camera.

The name set in this item will be displayed in the

[Server] options.

Off:

Live streaming does not resume automatically

even when the network is reconnected.

*1 The default value is “Server1/Server2/

Server3/Server4”.

*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

characters.

Type

When the power of the camera is turned off,

regardless of the settings in [Auto Restart], live

streaming does not begin automatically even

when power is turned on again and network

connection is established.

For configuring the system for transferring video

and audio to be distributed.

[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-TS/

TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTPRTSP/RTP, ZIXI, RTMP]

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when live streaming is configured to

“On”).

[Setting Values: RMPEG2-TS/UDP, MPEG2-TS/

TCP, MPEG2-TS/RTP, RTSP/RTP, RTMP] B

Memo :

Use reception devices that are compatible with

the respective transfer systems.

To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is

needed separately. A

The following items that can be set vary

depending on the setting of this item.

Destination Address

For setting details such as the host name and the

IP address of the live distribution destination.

Enter not more than 127 characters using

single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to

9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].

Network Menu 137

Destination URL

Username

For entering the URL of the live distribution

destination beginning with “rtmp://”.

There is no default value (blank).

For setting the user name.

The default value is “JVC”.

Enter not more than 31 characters.

You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII

Memo :

characters.

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“RTSP/RTP”.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“RTMP”.

Password

For setting the [Stream ID] password.

For ZIXI, there is no default value (blank).

For RTSP/RTP, a random alphanumeric value that

varies with each model is assigned as the default

value.

Destination Port

Enter the network port number of the live

distribution destination using an integer between 1

and 65535.

When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/UDP”, “MPEG2-

TS/TCP” or “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, the default value is

“6504”. If “ZIXI” is set, the default value is “2088”.

Enter not more than 127 characters. Enter not

more than 31 characters for RTSP/RTP setting.

Latency A

Memo :

For setting the latency mode.

When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP”, only

even numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified

for the port number.

[Setting Values: High, Medium, RLow, Min]

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“ZIXI”.

When [Type] is set to “MPEG2-TS/RTP” and

[SMPTE 2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”, N+2 and N

+4 port numbers are also used in addition to the

specified port number (N).

Adaptive Bit Rate A

If “On” is selected, the bit rate setting value of live

streaming is set to maximum limit, and the bit rate

is changed automatically according to changes in

the network bandwidth.

Stream ID A

For setting the registered stream ID of the live

distribution destination.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

The default value varies with the product model.

Enter not more than 63 characters.

[Adaptive Bit Rate] can be configured when

[Type] is configured to “ZIXI”.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“ZIXI”.

The bit rate is displayed on the status screen

only when “On” is set.

SMPTE 2022-1 FEC

Stream Key

Enter the stream key specified at the live

Set to “On” to use FEC (Forward Error Correction).

A transmission system that recovers the missing

packets in the decoding process without having to

retransmit the missing packets.

transmission destination.

There is no default value (blank).

Enter not more than 127 characters.

Memo :

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“RTMP”.

The decoder must be compatible with SMPTE

2022-1.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“MPEG2-TS/RTP”.

138 Network Menu

FEC Matrix

Bit Rate

For setting the amount of FEC (Forward Error

Correction) overhead for configuring

SMPTE2022-1.

For setting the encode bitrate of the video image

during live distribution.

The selectable options vary according to the

settings in [Live Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and

[Bit Rate].

(A P209 [Setting the FEC Matrix] )

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [SMPTE

2022-1 FEC] is set to “On”.

For details on the settings, please refer to

[Distributable [Record Format] and [Live Streaming

Set] Combinations] (A P 206).

Resolution

Memo :

For setting the resolution of the video image during

live distribution.

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).

Depending on the type of network adapter used

and the connection, images and audio sound

during live streaming may be choppy.

The available options vary according to the settings

for [WResolution] and [WFrame Rate] under

[Record Format].

W Resolution

Setting Value

1920x1080

1920x1080, 1280x720,

640x360, 720x480,

720x576

Return over IP Item

1440x1080

Function A

1280x720

1280x720,

For configuring the Return over IP function to

Enable or Disable when in the QuickTime(MPEG2)

or MXF(MPEG2) mode.

640x360

720x480 (U model) 720x480

720x576 (E model) 720x576

Memo :

[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when [Live Streaming] set to “On”).

The Aspect Ratio for the live streaming image is

fixed to “16:9”.

Configure this item when “QuickTime(MPEG2)”

or “MXF(MPEG2)” is selected for [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [WFormat].

The live streaming images may turn out different

depending on whether this item is configured to

“Enable” or “Disable”. It is recommended that

this item be configured to “Disable” if only live

streaming is to be used.

Frame Rate

For setting the frame rate of the video image during

live distribution.

When this is configured to “Enable” and

[Camera Process] B [Color Space] is

The options vary according to the settings of [Live

Streaming Set] B [Resolution] and the [WFrame

Rate] settings under [Record Format].

configured to “J-Log1” or “HLG”, live streaming

settings will be as follows.

W Frame Rate

60p, 60i

50p, 50i

30p

Setting Value

60p, 60i, 30p

50p, 50i, 25p

30p

[Color Space] “ITU709”

[Gamma] “Standard”

[Knee]“Manual”/[Level]“95.0%”

[Color Matrix] “Standard”

25p

Return over IP

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed during live

streaming (when live streaming is configured to

“On”).

For configuring Return over IP to On/Off.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

This is fixed at “Off” when [Return over IP] B

[Function] is set to “Disable”. A

Network Menu 139

Protocol

Server

For configuring the protocol of the video/audio

For selecting the source server for sending out

Return over IP audio/video.

source server to be connected.

[Setting Values: RUDP, TCP]

[Setting Values: RServer1, Server2, Server3,

Server4]

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“RTSP/RTP”.

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed while Return

over IP is operating (when [Return over IP] is set

to “On”).

When [Return over IP] B [Function] is

configured to “Disable”, this item cannot be

changed. A

Source Address

For configuring details such as the host name and

IP address of the video/audio transmission source.

There is no default value (blank).

You can enter up to 191 characters and ASCII

characters.

Return Server

Source Port

For configuring the source server for sending out

Enter the network port number of the video/audio

transmission source using an integer between 1

and 65535.

Return over IP audio/video.

Memo :

The default value is “554” when [Type] is set to

“RTSP/RTP”, “2077” when it is set to “ZIXI”, and

“5000” when it is set to Icecast.

The setting cannot be changed while Return

over IP is operating (when [Return over IP] is set

to “On”).

Memo :

Server1, Server2, Server3, Server4

When [Type] is set to “RTSP/RTP”, only even

numbers from 2 to 65530 can be specified for

the port number.

The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed

individually.

Alias

Stream ID

For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this

For configuring the stream ID registered on the

camera.

video/audio transmission source.

The name set in this item will be displayed in the

[Server] options.

There is no default value (blank).

Enter not more than 63 characters.

*1 The default value is “Server1/Server2/

Server3/Server4”.

*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII

Memo :

This item is available for setting when [Type] is

set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.

characters.

Type

Username

For setting the user name.

For configuring the system for transferring video

There is no default value (blank).

and audio to be distributed.

[Setting Values: RRTSP/RTP, ZIXI, Icecast] A

[Setting Values: RRTSP/RTP, Icecast] B

Enter not more than 63 characters.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“RTSP/RTP”.

Operates as IFB when the setting is configured

to “Icecast”.

Use transmission devices that are compatible

with the respective transfer systems.

To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is

needed separately.

The following items that can be set vary

depending on the setting of this item.

140 Network Menu

Password

Web Item

For setting the password.

There is no default value (blank).

Web Access

You can enter up to 31 characters when [Type]

is set to “RTSP/RTP”.

You can enter up to 127 characters when [Type]

is set to “ZIXI”.

To access via a web browser, set to “On”.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Camera Name

For setting the name to be displayed on the web

browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using

the software keyboard.

Memo :

This item is available for setting when [Type] is

set to “RTSP/RTP” or “ZIXI”.

(Default value: HC550 A, HC500 B)

Name A

Username

For configuring the name.

The default value is “HC550”.

For setting the user name. Enter not more than 31

characters using the software keyboard.

(Default value: jvc)

Enter not more than 31 characters.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“ZIXI”.

Password

Changes the password for accessing via a web

browser.

Latency A

The current password is displayed. Enter a new

password directly.

For setting the latency mode.

[Setting Values: Medium, RMin, Off]

Enter not more than 31 characters using the

software keyboard.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“ZIXI”.

(Default value: random alphanumeric value that

varies with each model)

Port

Mountpoint

Enter the mountpoint (character string for

identifying a stream) for streaming servers that

support multiple streams.

For configuring the port number during access to a

web page from an external source.

Memo :

There is no default value (blank).

Enter the name using the software keyboard.

Enter an integer between 1 and 65535. (Default

value: 80)

Enter not more than 63 characters.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“Icecast”.

To configure the setting to a number other than

the default value, specify the number of an

unused port.

For more details, please consult the

administrator of the network in use.

Network Menu 141

Password

Metadata Server Item

Enter the password for connecting to the FTP

server.

Meta-FTP1, Meta-FTP2, Meta-FTP3, Meta-

FTP4

Enter not more than 31 characters.

PASV Mode

The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed

individually.

For setting whether to set the communication mode

used for file transfer to the passive mode.

Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a

connection from the FTP server to the camera

cannot be established.

Alias

For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this

camera.

The name set in this item will be displayed in the

[Import Metadata] options.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

Enter not more than 31 characters.

Protocol

When [Protocol] is set to “SFTP”, this item

appears as “---” and cannot be selected.

For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be

connected.

FTP:

Upload Settings Item

Upload

Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming and

outgoing data.

SFTP:

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSH.

For configuring the method for uploading to the

FTP server.

FTPS:

Auto:

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode

(starts encrypted communication once

connection starts).

Select this option for automatic FTP transfer.

FTP transfer starts when [Auto Upload] is

configured to “On”.

Manual:

FTPES:

Select this option for manual FTP transfer from

the Media mode.

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode

(starts encrypted communication after

permission is granted).

[Setting Values: RAuto, Manual]

Auto Upload

[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES]

When [Upload] is configured to “Auto”, FTP

transfer starts automatically when the setting is

configured to “On”.

Server

For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)

or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP

server.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

Enter not more than 127 characters using

single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to

9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].

This is fixed at “Off” when [System] is set to

“High-Speed”.

Configuring [Auto Upload] to “On” disables

configuration of all the settings under the Upload

Settings item.

Port

Enter the FTP server port number to use using an

integer between 1 and 65535.

The default value varies with the protocol setting.

(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21)

Slot

File Path

For selecting the recording media slot to enable

Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/

automatic upload.

meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)

[Setting Values: RA, B]

Enter not more than 127 characters.

Username

Memo :

This is fixed at “EXT” when [System] is set to “4K

EXT (SSD)”.

Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP

server.

Enter not more than 31 characters.

142 Network Menu

Server

Cellular

For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)

or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP

server.

For configuring whether to enable connection via a

USB cellular adapter.

[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]

Enter not more than 127 characters using

single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to

9), single-byte hyphen [-], or dot [.].

Server

For configuring the server for uploading to the FTP

server.

Port

[Setting Values: RClip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-

FTP3, Clip-FTP4]

Enter the FTP server port number to use using an

integer between 1 and 65535.

The default value varies with the protocol setting.

(FTP: 21, SFTP: 22, FTPS: 990, FTPES: 21, ZIXI:

2088)

Clip Server

Clip-FTP1, Clip-FTP2, Clip-FTP3, Clip-

Dir. Path

FTP4

Enter the path name for the directory to upload to

The name that is set in [Alias] is displayed

individually.

(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)

Enter not more than 127 characters.

Username

Alias

For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this

Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP

camera.

server.

The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP

Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.

Enter not more than 31 characters.

Stream ID A

Enter not more than 31 characters.

Protocol

For configuring the stream ID that is registered at

the distribution destination.

For setting the protocol of the FTP server to be

The default value varies with the product model.

connected.

Enter not more than 63 characters.

FTP:

Protocol that does not encrypt the incoming and

outgoing data.

Memo :

This item is selectable only when [Type] is set to

“ZIXI”.

SFTP:

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSH.

Password

FTPS:

Enter the password for connecting to the FTP

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSL or TLS. It uses an implicit mode

(starts encrypted communication once

connection starts).

server.

Enter not more than 31 characters. Enter not

more than 127 characters for ZIXI setting.

PASV Mode

FTPES:

For setting whether to set the communication mode

used for file transfer to the passive mode.

Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a

connection from the FTP server to the camera

cannot be established.

Protocol that encrypts incoming and outgoing

data using SSL or TLS. It uses an explicit mode

(starts encrypted communication after

permission is granted).

ZIXI:

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

Enables stable transmission by reducing jitter

and packet loss significantly through

communicating via a relay server.

When [Protocol] is configured to “SFTP” or

“ZIXI”, this item appears as “---” and cannot be

selected.

[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES,

ZIXI] A

[Setting Values: RFTP, SFTP, FTPS, FTPES] B

Memo :

To use the “ZIXI” setting, a dedicated server is

needed separately.

If “ZIXI” is set, the resume function is enabled.

Network Menu 143

Type

Overlay Settings Menu

By selecting [Type], overlay images can be

displayed.

A L

The selectable types of scoreboards vary with the

[Layout] settings. L

This screen is used to configure overlay settings.

Images can be overlaid onto recorded video and

live stream video.

[Setting Values: Broadcast, RNone] A

[Setting Values: Broadcast, Basketball, Baseball,

Football, Type 2, Type 1, RNone] L

Overlay Function

Memo :

For specifying whether to activate the overlay

function.

Selecting [Layout] or [Type] of the scoreboard

overlay imported using [Import User Layout]

displays the team settings menu. L

[Setting Values: Enable, RDisable]

Memo :

The setting cannot be changed during

recording, streaming or Return over IP.

When [System] is configured to a setting other

than “HD” and “HD+Web”, this item is fixed at

“Disable”.

When “Disable” is selected, settings of the

overlay function cannot be changed.

Overlay Custom Menu

The display changes according to the imported

data.

Output

For specifying overlay output settings.

HD Recording

Layout

For setting whether to record overlay images

together with the recorded video into an SD card.

For selecting a SDP file.

Memo :

On:

Saves the video with overlay images into an SD

Create a SDP file using SDP Generator in

card.

Windows or Mac before recording.

Off:

Overlay images are not recorded into an SD

card.

Import User Layout

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Load the SDP file that is created by using SDP

HDMI

Generator onto this camera recorder.

Memo :

For setting whether to display overlay images on

HDMI output.

Maximum 4 files can be saved in this camera

On:

recorder.

Displays overlay images on streaming videos

The SDP file may not be saved depending on

the available memory capacity of the camera

recorder.

and HDMI output.

Off:

Displays overlay images only on streaming

videos.

Delete User Layout

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

For deleting the SDP file.

Memo :

SDI (Fixed)

Displays overlay images on the SDI output. Setting

The SDP file is not deleted by selecting [System]

B [Reset All]. Delete the file from the camera

recorder.

is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.

Overlay Settings Menu A L

144

Proxy Recording (Fixed)

Full Screen Graphic

Displays overlay images on the recording in slot B

when [System] is configured to “HD+Web”. Setting

is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.

Images can be displayed across the whole screen.

Status

For displaying the number of images saved in this

camera recorder and the memory capacity used.

(A P216 [Displaying Images on the Whole

Screen (Full Screen Graphic Function)] )

Live Streaming (Fixed)

Displays overlay images on live streaming videos.

Setting is fixed at “On” and cannot be changed.

Import Graphic W / Y

Sportzcast L

For reading the images to be used in Full Screen

This camera recorder can be linked to a Sporzcast

product to automatically import the scoreboard

data at sports stadiums.

Graphic from an SD card.

Memo :

JPEG and PNG formats are supported.

Enter not more than 31 characters for the file

name.

Connect:

Connects to the preconfigured Sportzcast

server.

Disconnect:

Delete Graphic

Terminates the current connection with the

Sportzcast server.

For deleting all images saved in this camera

[Setting Values: Connect, RDisconnect]

recorder.

Memo :

Password Lock

“Connect” cannot be selected if network

connection is not established.

The Overlay Settings menu can be locked with a

password.

Switches to “Disconnect” upon shifting to a

mode other than the Record mode or when the

unit is powered off.

On:

A password is required to open the Overlay

Settings menu.

[Settings] cannot be selected when [Overlay

Settings] B [Sportzcast] is configured to

“Connect”.

Off:

Opens the Overlay Settings menu without a

password.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

(A P218 [Protecting Overlay Settings with a

Password] )

Caution :

Settings

For specifying settings related to Sporzcast.

(A P146 [Settings Item L (Sportzcast)] )

Do not forget the password that you have set. If

the password is lost or forgotten, you cannot

deactivate the password protection function.

Watermark

Inserting watermarks (digital watermark) on

recorded videos protects the content of your work.

On:

Displays watermark.

Off:

Does not display watermark.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

It can be displayed when the SDP file for which

“Watermark” is preconfigured is selected in

[Layout].

Position

The display position of the watermark can be

changed by using the cross-shaped button.

Overlay Settings Menu A L

145

Settings Item L (Sportzcast)

BOT Number

Enter the BOT number provided by Sportzcast.

Server

Channel

Select the server to connect to.

Enter the channel provided by Sportzcast.

Cloud:

For configuring the setting when connecting to

the Sportzcast cloud service.

Score Input Source

For selecting whether to acquire the next score

information from the server or to manually input the

score from the web browser screen when

[Sportzcast] is set to “Connect”. This option comes

in handy when you want to manually enter only a

part of the information.

[Setting Values: RCloud, Server1 to Server3]

Sever Settings

Alias

For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this

camera. The name set in this item will be displayed

in the [Server] options.

Memo :

The [Display] and [Overlay] buttons on the web

browser screen remain enabled at all times

regardless of the setting of this item.

The [Display] and [Overlay] buttons on the web

browser screen remain enabled at all times

regardless of the setting of this item.

If the overlay display is not updated even though

the camera recorder is connected to a

Sportzcast server, check whether “Sportzcast”

is selected for each of the [Score Input Source]

items.

*1 The default value is “Cloud/Server1/Server2/

Server3”.

*2 You can enter up to 31 characters and ASCII

characters.

Address

For configuring details such as the host name and

the IP address of the destination of connection.

Enter not more than 127 characters using

single-byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to

9), single-byte hyphen [-] or dot [.].

Broadcast

Set to “On” when connecting 3 or more Scorebot

units to the camera at the same time.

The broadcast setting on the Scorebot also needs

to be set to “On”. For details on how to configure

the setting on the Scorebot, please consult

“Sportzcast”.

Display Order (Home)

For selecting whether to display the score

information of the home team that is acquired from

the Sportzcast in the left or right column (or upper

or lower row). However, in the case of a baseball

game, the score is always displayed in the lower

row regardless of the setting.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Last:

Search Local Server

Displays the score in the right column or lower

For searching local servers (Scorebot) that are

connected to the same local network as the camera

through the Wizard and configuring the selected

Scorebot to the [Server Settings].

row.

First:

Displays the score in the left column or upper

row.

[Setting Values: RLast, First]

Memo :

If a Scorebot is currently being connected,

searchcannotbeperformeduntiltheconnection

has been terminated.

Team Name

For selecting the data reference source for the

team name.

Old settings that are saved in [Server Settings]

at the storage destination will be overwritten.

Connection is automatically established upon

exiting the Wizard, and the [Server] setting

switches to [Server Settings] while the camera

is connected to the Scorebot.

[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]

Shot Clock

For selecting the data reference source for the shot

clock.

[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]

Others

License Name

For selecting the data reference source for score

information not included in the respective settings.

[Setting Values: RSportscast, Web]

Enter the license name provided by Sportzcast.

A license name that is currently in use by another

camera cannot be used.

Overlay Settings Menu A L

146

Setup File

System Menu

This allows you to save the menu settings as well

as the performance results of shutter speed and

AWB.

This menu screen allows system-related settings.

For configuring recording settings, formatting and

restoration of a recording media, tally lamp setting,

date/time, time zone and other settings.

It can also be used to reset the menu settings to

their default values.

It is useful to save settings according to different

shooting conditions.

Load File...

Loads the settings.

(A P174 [Loading a Setup File] )

Record Set...

Store File...

For specifying recorded video-related settings.

(A P149 [Record Set Item] )

Saves the settings.

(A P173 [Saving Setup Files] )

Media

Delete File...

Format Media

Deletes the settings.

For formatting (initializing) a recording media.

Select a card slot, select [Format] from [Cancel]/

[Format], and press the Set button (R) to format

(initialize) the card.

(A P174 [Deleting Setup Files] )

Tally Lamp

For setting whether to light up the tally lamp during

recording, when the remaining space warning is

displayed, or during live streaming.

Memo :

(A P51 [Formatting (Initializing) of Recording

Media] )

Restore Media

The blinking warning display, such as when the

remaining battery level is low, is enabled in a

setting other than “Off”.

For restoring a recording media.

Select a card slot, and press the Set button (R) to

restore the recording media.

(A P52 [Repairing the Recording Media] )

Rec/Live Streaming:

Memo :

Lights up during recording or live streaming.

Live Streaming:

[! RESTORE] appears in the remaining level

display area when a recording media that

requires repair is inserted. However, it is not

selectable when recording in Camera mode and

during Clip Review.

Lights up during live streaming. Does not light

up during recording.

Rec:

Lights up during recording.

External:

Lights up when the camera recorder is

controlled by an external device such as RM-

LP100.

When external is selected, [PVW] is displayed

on the LCD/VF screen during Preview Tally, and

[PGM] is displayed on the LCD/VF screen

during Program Tally.

Off:

Turns off the indicator.

[Setting Values: Rec/Live Streaming, Live

Streaming, RRec, External, Off]

System Menu 147

NETWORK LED

Reset All

When this is configured to “On”, it lights up in red

when live streaming is in progress.

Resets all menu settings.

Memo :

The LED lights up in orange during poor streaming

connection or connection failure.

[Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.

(A P148 [ Date/Time ] )

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

(A P149 [ Time Zone ] )

This item is not selectable when recording in

Camera mode, during Clip Review, during live

streaming and in Media mode.

STATUS LED

For configuring the STATUS LED.

REC/Pre Rec:

Lights up in red during recording or transition to

recording. Lights up in orange when the

remaining space on the recording media is

running low. Lights up in green when Pre Rec is

on standby.

Date/Time

For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

Memo :

The display order of the date (year, month, day)

follows the setting in [Display Settings] B [Date

Style]. However, the 24-hour format is used for

the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]

setting.

External:

Lights up in red while in the Program mode when

an external device such as RM-LP100 is

connected. Lights up in green while in the

Preview mode.

(A P91 [Special Recording] )

Return over IP:

For setting the time acquired from the GPS

satellite by pressing the [FOCUS ASSIST/1]

button if radio wave reception from the GPS

satellite allows for setting of the date and time.

The [USER1] button is grayed out if information

for setting the date and time cannot be acquired

from the GPS satellite. A L

Lights up in green during Return over IP or when

IFB is in progress. Lights up in orange when an

error has occurred.

Off:

Does not light up.

[Setting Values: RREC/Pre Rec, External, Return

over IP, Off]

LED Bright

Date Style

For specifying the brightness of the NETWORK

LED and STATUS LED.

For setting the date display sequence for display

on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well

as for time stamp recording.

[Setting Values: High, Middle, Low]

Display examples of the setting values are as

follows.

GPS A L

For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power

on/off).

DMY2: 30 Jun 2019

DMY1: 30-06-2019

MDY2: Jun 30, 2019

MDY1: 06-30-2019

YMD: 2019-06-30

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Memo :

When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B [SDI OUT1

Res.] is set to “1080p”, configuring [System] B

[GPS] to “On” changes the setting to “1080i”.

[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,

YMD]

(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E

model))

Language

Switches between languages in the menu screen.

[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Español] (U

model)

[Setting Values: REnglish, Français, Deutsch,

Italiano, Español, Pусский, Türkçe] (E model)

148 System Menu

Record Set Item

Record Format

Time Style

For setting the time display for display on the LCD

monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time

stamp recording.

After setting of all items in the [Record Format]

menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the

screen to apply the new settings on the camera

recorder and switch the recording format. A

“Please Wait...” message appears during

switching.

[Setting Values: R24hour, 12hour]

Time Zone

For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30

minutes.

[Setting Values: UTC-12:00-UTC-00:30, UTC,

UTC+00:30-UTC+14:00 (in 30 min increments)]

(Default values: UTC-05:00 (U model), UTC (E

model))

System

For selecting a system definition.

4K EXT (SSD):

Records videos in “4K EXT” quality to

Memo :

[EXT.SLOT] (SSD media).

If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]

item is automatically adjusted when [Time

Zone] is altered.

4K:

Records in “4K” quality for both slots A and B.

HD:

Records in “HD” (High Definition) quality for both

Reserved

slots A and B.

SD:

For setting the additional function to “On” or “Off”.

Records in “SD” (Standard Definition) quality for

both slots A and B.

Reserved 1 to Reserved 16

HD+Web:

Normally set to “Off”.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and

in resolution suitable for web distribution for slot

System Information

High-Speed:

Version

Records slow motion videos in “HD” (High

Definition) for both slot A and slot B.

Displays information on the firmware version.

[Setting Values: 4K EXT (SSD), 4K, RHD, SD, HD

Display

0000-0000

+Web, High-Speed]

Fan Hour

Caution :

For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.

Memo :

The selectable options for the [WFormat]/

[GFormat], [WResolution]/[GResolution],

[WFrame Rate]/[GFrame Rate], [WBit Rate]/

[GBit Rate], [WAudio]/[GAudio], [YFormat],

[YResolution], [YFrame Rate], [YBit Rate] and

[YAudio] settings vary depending on the setting

of this item.

Under normal environment, dust will

accumulate on the internal fan when the camera

recorder is used over a long period. Dust may

enter the camera recorder especially if it is used

outdoors. This may affect the image and sound

quality of the camera recorder. Check and

replace the fan after every 9000 hours

(suggested guideline).

Open Source License

Displays the license for the open source software

used by this camera recorder.

System Menu 149

WFormat/ GFormat

WResolution/ GResolution

For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to

For selecting the size of the still image to be

recorded to the recording media in slot A or

[EXT.SLOT]. (Horizontal x vertical)

the recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].

QuickTime(MPEG2):

QuickTime file format (.MOV)

MXF(MPEG2):

The available options vary according to the settings

of [System] and [WFormat].

MXF (material exchange format)

QuickTime(H.264):

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)” or “4K”:

Fixed at “3840x2160”.

QuickTime file format (.MOV)

Exchange: (U model only)

Sports Video Interop Group format

MP4 (H.264): (E model only)

MP4 file format

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is

set to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or “MXF(MPEG2)”:

[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,

1280x720]

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is

set to “QuickTime(H.264)”:

[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),

MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), Exchange]

(U model only)A

[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is

set to “Exchange” (U model only):

[Setting Values: QuickTime(MPEG2),

MXF(MPEG2), RQuickTime(H.264), MP4 (H.

264)](E model only)A

[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] is

set to “MP4(H.264)” (E model only):

[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]

When [System] is set to “HD+Web”:

[Setting Values: 1920x1080, 1280x720]

When [System] is set to “High-Speed”:

Fixed at “1920x1080”.

[Setting Values: RQuickTime(H.264), Exchange]

(U model only)B

[Setting Values: RQuickTime(H.264), MP4 (H.

264)](E model only)B

[Setting Values: QuickTime(H.264), RExchange]

Memo :

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, this

item is fixed at “ProRes”.

When [System] is set to “4K”, “SD”, “HD+Web”,

or “High-Speed”, this item is fixed at

“QuickTime(H.264)”.

Exchange file format can be selected only when

[System] is set to “HD”.

Exchange format is used under license from

Sports Video Interoperability Group, Inc..

When [System] is set to “SD”:

Fixed at either “720x480” or “720x576”.

Memo :

The selectable values of [WFrame Rate]/

[GFrame Rate] and [WBit Rate]/[GBit Rate]

vary according to the setting of this item.

150 System Menu

WFrame Rate/ GFrame Rate

WBit Rate/ GBit Rate

For selecting the frame rate for recording to the

recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].

The available options vary according to the settings

for [System], [WResolution]/[GResolution] and

[WFormat]/[GFormat].

For selecting the bit rate for recording to the

recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].

The available options vary according to the settings

for [System], [WResolution]/[GResolution] and

[WFormat]/[GFormat].

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”:

[Setting Values: 422HQ, 422, 422LT]

When [System] is set to “4K”:

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”:

[Setting Values: 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p]

When [System] is set to “4K”:

[Setting Values:

150M, 150M, 70M]

[Setting Values: 30p, 25p, 24p]

When [System] is set to “HD”, [WFormat] is set

to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or

“MXF(MPEG2)”A, and [WResolution] is set

to “1920x1080”:

When [System] is set to “HD”, [WFormat] is set

to “QuickTime(MPEG2)” or

“MXF(MPEG2)”A, and [WResolution] is set

to “1440x1080”:

[Setting Values: 60i, 50i, 30p, 25p]

When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”,

[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.264)”, and

[WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”:

[Setting Values: 60p, 60i, 50p, 50i, 30p, 25p,

24p]

[Setting Values: 35M (HQ), 25M (SP)]

When [WResolution] is set to a setting other than

“1440x1080”, it is fixed at “35M (HQ)”.

When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web” and

[WFormat] is set to “QuickTime(H.264)”:

When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”,

and [WFrame Rate] is set to “60p” or “50p”:

When [System] is set to “HD”, and

[WResolution] to “1440x1080”:

[Setting Values: 60i, 50i]

[Setting Values:

70M (XHQ),

When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web” and

[WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:

[Setting Values: 60p, 50p]

50M (XHQ), 50M (XHQ)]

When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”,

and [WFrame Rate] to “60i”/“50i”/“30p”/“25p”/

“24p”:

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to

“Exchange”:

[Setting Values:

50M (XHQ), 50M

Fixed at “60p”. (U model only)

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to

“MP4(H.264)”:

(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]

When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:

[Setting Values:

(UHQ)]

50M (XHQ), 35M

Fixed at “50p”. (E model only)

When [System] is set to “SD”:

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to

“Exchange” (U model only):

Fixed at “60i”. (U model only)

When [System] is set to “SD”:

When [System] is set to “HD”, and [WFormat] to

“MP4(H.264)” (E model only):

Fixed at “50i”. (E model only)

When [System] is set to “High-Speed”:

[Setting Values: 120/60p, 100/50p, 120/30p,

100/25p, 120/24p]

When [WResolution] is set to “1920x1080”:

Fixed at “12M(LP)”.

When [WResolution] is set to “1280x720”:

Fixed at “8M(LP)”.

When [System] is set to “SD”:

Fixed at 8M (HQ).

When [System] is set to “High-Speed”:

When [WFrame Rate] is set to “120/60p” or

“100/50p”

[Setting Values:

70M (XHQ),

50M (XHQ), 50M (UHQ)]

When [WFrame Rate] is configured to a

setting other than “120/60p” and “100/50p”

[Setting Values:

50M (XHQ), 50M

(XHQ), 35M (UHQ)]

System Menu 151

WAudio/ GAudio

Y Frame Rate

For switching to the audio that is to be recorded to

the recording media in slot A or [EXT.SLOT].

The selectable options vary according to the

settings in [WFormat]/[GFormat] or [WBit Rate]/

[GBit Rate].

The frame rate of the image to be recorded to the

SD card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to

“HD+Web”.

The value fixed varies according to the settings for

[WFrame Rate].

Fixed at “60i”, “50i”, “30p”, “25p” or “24p”.

Y Format

Memo :

For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to

the SD card in slot B when [System] is configured

to “HD+Web”.

When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,

this item is fixed at the same setting as [WFrame

Rate].

This is fixed at QuickTime (H.264).

Memo :

Y Bit Rate

When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,

this item is fixed at the same setting as

[WFormat].

The bit rate of the image to be recorded to the SD

card in slot B is fixed when [System] is set to “HD

+Web”.

The value fixed varies according to the settings for

[YResolution].

Y Resolution

For selecting the size of the image to be recorded

to the SD card in slot B when [System] is configured

to “HD+Web”. (Horizontal x vertical)

“3M(HQ)” when [YResolution] is configured

to “960x540”

“1.2M(LP)” when [YResolution] is configured

When [System] is set to “HD+Web”:

to “480x270”

When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “60p”/

“8M(HQ)” when [YResolution] is configured

“60i”/“30p”

to “720x480” or “720x576”

Memo :

[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x480,

480x270]

When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,

this item is fixed at the same setting as [WBit

Rate].

When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “50p”/

“50i”/“25p”

[Setting Values: 960x540, 720x576,

480x270]

Y Audio

When [WFrame Rate] is configured to “24p”

[Setting Values: 960x540, 480x270]

The audio to be recorded to slot B is the same as

the audio to be recorded to slot A.

Memo :

When [System] is set to other than “HD+Web”,

this item is fixed at the same setting as

[WResolution].

SD Aspect

For setting the aspect ratio of the image when

[System] is set to “SD”.

[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]

Memo :

For conditions other than those above, this item

is fixed at “16:9”.

152 System Menu

Rec Mode

Slot Mode

For selecting the mode for recording to the

recording media.

For setting the operation of the card slot.

Series:

Mode that activates slots A and B sequentially.

Dual:

[Setting Values: RNormal, Pre Rec, Clip

Mode that activates slots A and B

simultaneously.

Continuous, Interval Rec, Frame Rec]

Memo :

(A P88 [Dual Rec] )

Backup:

When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is

fixed at “Normal”.

Mode that enables recording to slot B without

using the [REC] button. This item is selectable

only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.

Record, start and stop operations can be

controlled from the [Backup Rec] menu or using

the user button that is assigned with “Backup

Trig”.

(A P89 [Backup Rec] )

[Setting Values: RSeries, Dual, Backup]

Memo :

This is fixed at “Normal” when [System] B

[Record Format] B [System] is configured to any

of the following.

4K EXT (SSD)

HD+Web

High-Speed

Pre Rec Time

For setting the pre-recording time when [Rec

Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.

When this is configured to “Series” and

recordable media is inserted into slot A or slot B

or both the slots, pressing the [REC] button

starts recording only to the card in the selected

slot (active slot).

[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]

Memo :

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] is set to “4K”, this item is

fixed at “5sec”.

When this is configured to “Dual” and recordable

media are inserted into both slots A and B,

pressing the [REC] button starts simultaneous

recording to the cards in both slots.

Rec Frames

For setting the number of frames to record when

[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.

[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]

When [System] is configured to 4K EXT (SSD)

or “HD+Web”, “---” is displayed.

When [System] is set to “High-Speed”, this item

is fixed at “Series”.

Rec Interval

For setting the recording time interval when [Rec

Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.

Backup Rec

[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,

1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]

For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/

[STBY].

This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set

to “Backup”.

Memo :

When recording is stopped due to no remaining

space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at

“STOP” and cannot be selected.

System Menu 153

4GB File Spanning(SDXC)

Clip Set

A recording file is automatically split when the size

exceeds 4 GB, but if an SDXC card is used, you

can record clips larger than 4 GB by setting this

option to “Off”. (Up to a maximum of 64 GB or 4

hours)

Clip Name Prefix

For configuring the first four characters of the name

oftheclipfiletoberecordedtotherecordingmedia.

Enter any of the 36 characters including alphabets

(upper case) and numbers (0 to 9) using the

software keyboard.

On:

Splits a file when it exceeds 4 GB or 30 minutes.

Off:

(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )

[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is

the last three digits of the serial number.)

Splits a file when it exceeds 64 GB or 4 hours.

[Setting Values: ROn, Off]

Reset Clip Number

Memo :

For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by

This option is only valid if the SD card used for

resetting it (0001).

recording is of the SDXC format.

Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset

the number.

During simultaneous recording, such as Dual

Rec and backup recording, this option is valid

only when the SD cards in slots A and B are of

the SDXC format.

If there are other clips on the recording media, it will

be assigned with the smallest available number.

Example:

If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD” and

“ABCD0001” already exists on the recording

media, “ABCD0002” will be assigned.

LPCM (QuickTime)

For setting the audio recording format of

QuickTime.

[Setting Values: Dual Mono, RStereo]

Clear Planning Metadata

Time Stamp

Erases the planning metadata downloaded from

the FTP server.

For setting whether to display shooting date/time

information in the recorded video.

[Setting Values: On, ROff]

This item also deletes the metadata loaded using

the setup files (“User File”/“All File”).

Memo :

The date/time display style can be changed in

[Date Style]/[Time Style].

(A P154 [ 4GB File Spanning(SDXC) ] )

The setting cannot be changed during

recording, streaming or Return over IP.

When [System] is set to “4K EXT (SSD)”, “4K” or

“High-Speed”, this item is fixed at “Off”.

When [Overlay Function] is set to “Enable”, this

item is fixed at “Off”. A L

154 System Menu

Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu

Adding/Editing

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open

the [Main Menu] screen.

Select the menu or submenu item to add.

Frequently Used Menu

Items (Favorites Menu)

You can select and add/edit frequently used menu

items freely to create a personal menu screen

(Favorites Menu).

Display Settings

Focus

Meter

Memo :

[Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera

mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged

even when the recording format changes.

Up to 20 menu items can be added.

Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset

even when [System] B [Reset All] is executed.

Long descriptive names may be displayed for

the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable

better understanding.

Memo :

Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be

performed in the following cases. [USER1

Add] is displayed in gray in the operation guide.

Selected item is already added to [Favorites

Menu].

Number of menu items that can be added (20

items) is exceeded.

Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

A screen to confirm the addition appears.

Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).

The selected menu item is added to [Favorites

Menu].

Add to Favorites Menu?

Focus

Add

Cancel

Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu) 155

Editing Favorites Menu

Press the [OIS/2] button.

A delete mark (b) appears at the beginning of

the menu item.

You can delete or change the order of the items

added to [Favorites Menu].

Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]

Edit Favorites

Aspect Marker

Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to

open the [Main Menu] screen.

Press the [DISPLAY] button or press and

hold down the [MENU/THUMB] button to

open the [Favorites Menu] screen.

Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set

button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).

The header turns magenta and the editing

mode is activated.

Memo :

When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while

the menu item with the delete mark (b) is

selected, the menu item will be excluded from

the items to be deleted and the delete mark (b)

disappears.

Favorites Menu

Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]

editing mode appears.

Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set

button (R).

Edit Favorites

Camera Function...

Edit Favorites

Header

(Magenta)

Save & Exit

Exit without Saving

Cancel

Select the menu or submenu item to delete.

Memo :

Deletion is not complete until the changes are

saved with [Save & Exit].

Edit Favorites

To exit the editing mode without deleting any

items, select [Exit without Saving].

To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].

Aspect Marker

156 Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)

Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites

Menu]

Select the menu or submenu item to move

and press the Set button (R).

The moving mode is activated and a position

selection bar for the move appears.

Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.

Press the [MENU/THUMB] button to open the

[Favorites Menu] screen.

Edit Favorites

Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set

button (R) or crossed-shaped button (I).

The header turns magenta and the editing

mode is activated.

TC/UB

Favorites Menu

Edit Favorites

TC/UB

Position

Selection

Bar

Edit Favorites

Camera Function...

Header

(Magenta)

Select the position to move to with the

cross-shaped button (JK).

Move the position selection bar with the cross-

shaped button (JK) and select a position to

move to.

Press the Set button (R).

The selected item moves to the new position.

Edit Favorites

TC/UB

Edit Favorites

TC/UB

Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu) 157

Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.

The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]

editing mode appears.

Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set

button (R).

Edit Favorites

Save & Exit

Exit without Saving

Cancel

Memo :

Moving is not complete until the changes are

saved with [Save & Exit].

To exit the editing mode without saving any

changes, select [Exit without Saving].

To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].

158 Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items (Favorites Menu)

!INCORRECT

Display Screen in Camera

Mode

When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B [Display

On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is

hidden. However, the display may appear during

event display or warning display.

Recording media is not supported.

When an SD card lower than Class 10 is

inserted while in the XHQ mode.

W!REC INH

When attempting to record more than 4

GBwhileanSDcardthatdoesnotsupport

recording of more than 4 GB is inserted.

The following icons are displayed during FTP

upload.

Memo :

When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B

[DisplayOn/Off]issetto “On”, thedisplayscreen

appears only in the following cases if it has been

turned off.

(A P182 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )

Icon

Status

[Auto Upload] is configured to

“On” and in the standby state.

“A” is displayed at the top left

corner of the icon while in the

Auto FTP mode.

Approximately 3 seconds when changes are

being made

During event display or warning display

Display Screen

Auto FTP transfer is in progress.

Three images are alternately

displayed, and the arrows

become animated.

k j

c b

120/60fps

1080 /30p

282min

100min

50min

00:00:00.00

FTP transfer is in progress.

Three images are alternately

displayed, and the arrows

become animated. In this case,

instead of the remaining

recordable time on the

5 . 6 f t

12 :34 :56

COMPRESS

ITU709

ND1

/64

ꢀꢁ ꢂꢁ ꢃꢁ ꢄꢁ

ꢁ

recording media, an estimated

value of the remaining transfer

time is displayed.

ISO

F2. 8

5600

/ 60

102400

J K L M

Voltage/Battery Power

Error has occurred during FTP

Displays the current status of the power supply

in use.

transfer.

(Yellow)

(A P67 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )

Memo :

The displayed time is an estimate.

Even when the display screen is turned off and

[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Battery] is set to

“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a

warning.

Even when the display screen is hidden and

[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Media

Remain] is set to “Off”, this will be displayed

when there is a warning.

Remaining Space on Media

Volume Operation Indicator

Displays the remaining recording time for the

recording media in slot A and slot B separately.

Displayed when there are changes made to the

volume of the headphone(x) (0 to 15), the

values of LCD BRIGHT (E) or PEAKING (J)

(-10 to +10).

W Y

Currently selected slot. (White card)

W z

W!INVALID

Write-protect switch of SD card is set.

Operation lock

When a recording media

writing/reading error has

occurred, or when the

recording media is

irreparable.

The r icon appears during operation lock.

Memo :

The s icon appears for 3 seconds after

operation lock is turned off.

W!FORMAT

Recording media requires

formatting.

W!RESTORE

Recording media requires

repair.

Display Screen in Camera Mode 159

Camera Angle [Tagging] L

Shutter

Displays the camera angle tagging information

The current shutter speed appears on the

screen.

when [WFormat] is configured to “Exchange”.

(A P111 [ Shutter ] )

ODK [Tagging] L

When the camera recorder is switched to the

Full Auto shooting mode by turning the [FULL

AUTO] switch to “ON” or when it is switched

to the Automatic Shutter mode with [Camera

Function] B [Shutter] configured to “EEI”, the

a icon appears on the left side of the shutter

speed.

Displays the ODK (Offence, Defence, Kick)

tagging information when [WFormat] is

configured to “Exchange”. It flashes in red when

in the REMOVE mode.

Black Toe

Displays the Black Toe setting.

Memo :

The “Normal” appears for 3 seconds after

changing to Normal.

The variable range of the shutter speed varies

according to the video format settings.

While in the Automatic Shutter mode, and [AE

Color Space Display

Displays the color space.

Lock] is set to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a

icon

Memo :

appears on the left side of the shutter speed

This can be configured in [Camera Process] B

[Color Space].

during lock operation.

“[OFF]” appears for 3 seconds after Shutter is

configured to Off.

(A P118 [ Color Space ] )

“[OFF]” is displayed when in the low-light

shooting mode.

Audio Level Meter

Displays the audio levels for CH-1 to CH-2.

a appears on the screen when in the Auto

mode.

AE Level

Displayed when the AE function is activated.

When operated while manual operation is

disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.

4030 20 10

Gain

This is grayed out when in a mode that does

not support audio recording or when the

audio is not supported.

You can select to display the gain in “dB” or

“ISO”.

(A P129 [ Gain ] )

Iris F-Number

Displays the gain value when in the Manual

Gain mode.

Displays F-number of the lens iris.

(A P126 [ Focus Assist ] )

A a icon appears on the left side of the gain

value in the “AGC” mode.

Memo :

“LUX” is displayed to the left of the gain value

when in the Low-light shooting mode.

A a icon appears on the left side of the lens

aperture value (F-number) during Auto Iris

mode.

Memo :

While in the Auto Iris mode, and [AE Lock] is set

While in the “AGC” mode, and [AE Lock] is set

to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a icon appears on the

left side of the gain value during lock operation.

to “AE” or “AE/FAW”, a

icon appears on the

left side of the lens aperture value (F-number)

during lock operation.

(A P117 [ AE Lock ] )

ND Filter Position

Displays the current ND filter position.

160 Display Screen in Camera Mode

White Balance Mode

Focus Assist

Displays the current white balance mode.

(*****K indicates color temperature)

“

” is displayed when auto focus is

activated.

When ACCU-Focus is enabled, “ACCU

”

A *****K

B *****K

P *****K

When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]

switchissetto“A”intheManualWhite

Balance mode.

blinks for about 10 seconds while Focus

Assist starts up, after which the “

indicator lights up.

”

When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]

switch is set to “B” in the Manual

White Balance mode.

If recording starts while [ACCU-Focus] is

active, [ACCU-Focus] will be forcibly

deactivated.

When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET]

switch is set to “PRESET” in the

Manual White Balance mode.

During Full Auto White Balance

mode.

Luminance Information

Displayed when the Spot Meter function is

activated.

FAW

While in the Full Auto White Balance

mode, and [AE Lock] is set for “FAW”

or “AE/FAW” during lock operation.

MAX

Maximum luminance

Minimum luminance

MIN

Zebra pattern

During zebra pattern display,

(A P70 [Preset Mode (PRESET)] )

(A P71 [Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode

(B)] )

(zebra icon)

is displayed on the display screen in Camera

mode.

Memo :

(A P82 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )

When [Preset Paint], [AWB Paint] or [FAW

Paint] is set to a setting other than the default

value, a q icon is displayed to the right of the

color temperature.

Time Display

Displays the current time.

Memo :

The date/time display style can be configured in

Expanded Focus/Histogram

[System] B [Date/Time].

Displayed upon pressing the user button that is

assigned with “Expanded Focus” and

“Histogram”.

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Time

Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is not displayed.

Focus Display

Memo :

Displays the focus state and the approximate

distance to the subject in focus.

Display switches in the order of “Expanded

Focus” > “Histogram”.

Manual focus

Autofocus

Infrared Recording

Autofocus lock

“I” is displayed when the infrared recording is

[AF Area]-“Wide”

[AF Area]-“Multi”

ON.

Face Detection

Displayed when Face Detection is ON.

Memo :

When [Face Detection] is set to

“ON”

When [Face Only AF] is configured

to “ON” while [Face Detection] is

“ON”

The displayed unit of measurement (feet or

meter) can be configured in [LCD/VF] B [Display

Type] B [Focus].

When focus display is grayed, Auto Focus

cannot function.

Image Stabilizer Mark

Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.

When [Level] of [OIS] is set to

“Normal”.

When [Level] of [OIS] is set to “High”.

Memo :

When Image Stabilizer is configured to “OFF”,

h is displayed for 3 seconds.

Display Screen in Camera Mode 161

Zoom Display

Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display

Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or

value)

Displays the time code (hour: minute:

second: frame) or user’s bit data.

Example of time code display:

Display Screen

Dynamic Zoom Off:

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0

Dynamic Zoom On:

Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot

(.) denotes drop frames.

The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3

seconds after the zoom operation is

activated.

Example of user’s bit display:

Display Screen

The value will always be displayed.

Dynamic Zoom Off: Z00 to Z99

Dynamic Zoom On: DZ000 to DZ149

When[DigitalExtender]isconfiguredto“On”,

“F” is displayed to the right of the zoom

display.

FF EE DD 20

Memo :

Use [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [TC/UB] to

toggle between the time code display and user’s

bit display.

Memo :

The mode of display (value or bar) can be

configured in [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B

[Zoom].

Time Code Lock Indicator

When the built-in time code generator is

synchronized to the external time code data

input during the synchronization of time code

with another camera recorder, Z lights up.

Network Connection Icon

The network connection status is displayed.

IFB/RET Mark

Icon

Status

Displays the status of the IFB or Return over IP.

Wireless LAN connection from the

Icon

Status

During audio feed only

host terminal (USB) is established

Wired LAN connection from the

host terminal (USB) is established

When an error occurs during

audio feed only

Cellular adapter connection from

the host terminal (USB) is

established

(Yellow)

During video+audio feed

When a USB adapter different

from the connection settings is

detected

When an error occurs during

video+audio feed

Built-in wireless LAN connection is

established

(Yellow)

LAN terminal connection is

established

When an unusable USB

adapter is detected

When the LAN cable is not

connected

(No

display)

Memo :

Yellow display indicates preparation for

connection in progress.

162 Display Screen in Camera Mode

SDI/HDMI Record Trigger

Media Status

----

STBY B : When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B

[SDI OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to

“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI

OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”

and recording is stopped

A card is not detected in the

selected slot, and [Tally

Lamp] is configured to a setting

other than “External” or

[STATUS LED] is configured to

a setting other than “External”

Recording standby

REC B

When [A/V Set] B [Video Set] B

[SDI OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to

“Type-A” or “Type-B”, or [HDMI

OUT] B [Rec Trigger] is set to “On”

and recording is in progress

STBY

RREC

REVIEW

Recording

Clip Review

(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately

(Clip Review)] )

GPS Mark A L

When [System] B [GPS] is set to “On”, the

signal reception status is displayed.

STBY O

Pre Rec recording standby

(A P91 [Pre Rec] )

RRECO Pre Rec recording

(A P91 [Pre Rec] )

STBY L

Memo :

Clip Continuous Rec recording

standby

The display changes according to the signal

reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be

received, the H mark appears in yellow

regardless of the [LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off]

B [GPS] setting.

This item is not displayed when [GPS] is set to

“Off”.

RRECL

Clip Continuous Rec recording

STBYL

Clip Continuous Rec recording

(displayed in pause

yellow)

(A P96 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter

STBY N

Interval Rec recording standby

(A P95 [Interval Rec] )

STBYN

(displayed in

red)

Interval recording pause

RRECN

Interval Rec recording

(A P95 [Interval Rec] )

STBY M

(A P94 [Frame Rec] )

RRECM Frame Rec recording

Frame Rec recording standby

(A P94 [Frame Rec] )

STBYM

Frame Rec recording pause

(displayed in

yellow)

(A P94 [Frame Rec] )

STOP

Unable to record to the card in

the slot

P.OFF

Power OFF

During clip cutter recording

(displayed for 3 seconds)

Trig)] )

PGM

Receiving program signals

from an external device, such

as a remote control unit

PVW

Receiving preview signals

from an external device, such

as a remote control unit

Display Screen in Camera Mode 163

Live streaming mark

When [Network] B [Live Streaming] B [Live

Streaming] is set to “On”, the distribution status

is displayed.

(A P103 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )

Icon

(Red)

Status

Distribution in progress (good

connection quality)

Distribution in progress (poor

connection quality)

Waiting for connection

(RTSP/RTP only), connection

failed

(Yellow)

High-Speed Frame Rate

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] is configured to “High-

Speed”, the setting value for [WFrame Rate]

is displayed.

OK Mark

Displayed when OK mark has been appended.

Recording Format

Displays the recording format.

Memo :

The resolution, frame rate and bit rate can be

viewed on the status screen.

Event/Warning Display Area

Displays error messages.

(A P231 [Error Messages and Actions] )

164 Display Screen in Camera Mode

Position Bar

Display Screen in Media

Mode

When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B [Display

On/Off] is set to “Off”, the corresponding display is

hidden.

Displays the current position in the video.

During trimming, the position bar appears in

green, and icons for the in and out points are

displayed.

6 : Current position of the video

Position to start trimming

(In point)

Position to end trimming

Memo :

(Out point)

Display on the information display area can be

toggled using the [ONLINE/3] button.

When the display setting for [LCD/VF] B

[DisplayOn/Off]issetto“On”, thedisplayscreen

appears only in the following cases if it has been

turned off.

Volume Operation Indicator

Displayed when there are changes made to the

volume of the headphone(x), speaker(K) (0

to 15), the values of LCD BRIGHT (E) or

PEAKING (J) (-10 to +10).

During event display or warning display

Information Display

Use the [ONLINE/3] button to switch between

camera information display, GPS display and

turning off the display.

Q P

1000/2000

282min

3840x2160

30p 140M

00:00:00.00

The GPS display displays information on the

recording location of the video being played

back only when GPS information has been

recorded.

Jan 24,2019

12 :34 :56

Camera information display displays only

information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White

Balance that have been recorded.

4030 20 10

Voltage/Battery Power

0dB

F1.6

1/100

5600K

Displays the current status of the power supply

in use.

(A P159 [Volume Operation Indicator] )

Camera Information Display

Memo :

Display Off

Even when the display screen is turned off and

[LCD/VF] B [Display On/Off] B [Battery] is set to

“Off”, this will be displayed when there is a

warning.

+35.483197

+139.652172

Resolution

Displays the video image resolution.

Frame Rate/Bit Rate

GPS Display

Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.

Operation Guide

Memo :

Displays a guide for the current operation

buttons.

Trimming information is displayed while

trimming is in progress. In this case, pressing the

[ONLINE/3] button does not switch the display.

The information display area is not subject to the

display settings of the items in [LCD/VF] B

[Display On/Off].

Audio Level Meter

Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.

4030 20 10

The display appears when the volume (0 to

15) of the headphone or speaker changes.

Display Screen in Media Mode 165

Date/Time Display

Time Code (I)/User’s Bit (J) Display

Displays the date/time that is recorded on the

currently played recording media.

Displays the time code (hour: minute:

second: frame) or user’s bit data recorded in

the recording media being played back.

Example of time code display:

Memo :

The date/time display style can be specified in

[System] B [Date Style]/[Time Style].

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0

(A P103 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )

Colon (:) denotes non-drop frames and dot

(.) denotes drop frames.

Network Connection Icon

The network connection status is displayed.

Icon

Status

Example of user’s bit display:

Wireless LAN connection from the

FF EE DD 20

host terminal (USB) is established

Memo :

Wired LAN connection from the

host terminal (USB) is established

Use [LCD/VF] B [Display Type] B [TC/UB] to

toggle between the time code display and user’s

bit display.

Cellular adapter connection from

the host terminal (USB) is

established

When a USB adapter different

from the connection settings is

detected

Check Mark

Displayed when the currently played clip is

selected.

OK Mark

Displayed when OK mark has been appended.

Built-in wireless LAN connection is

established

Media Status

LAN terminal connection is

established

PLAY

STILL

FWD *

Playing

Still picture playback mode

High-speed playback in the

forward direction (* playback

speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or 360x)

High-speed playback in the

reverse direction (* reverse

playback speed: 5x, 15x, 60x, or

360x)

When an unusable USB

adapter is detected

When the LAN cable is not

connected

(No

display)

REV *

Memo :

The icon appears blinking when the camera

recorder is starting up, and is displayed in yellow

while getting ready to connect.

STOP

P.OFF

Stop mode

Power OFF

Clip Information

Displays current clip number/total number of

clips.

Media

Displays the media slot of the currently

played clip.

z appears when the write-protect switch of

the SD card is set.

Event/Warning Display Area

Displays error messages.

(A P231 [Error Messages and Actions] )

166 Display Screen in Media Mode

Record Format Screen

Status Screen

For checking the settings of the camera recorder.

For checking settings related to the recording

format.

USER Switch Set Screen

For checking the status (functions assigned) of the

user buttons.

(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )

Audio Screen

For checking the audio settings.

Camera Screen

For checking information related to shooting using

the camera recorder.

Video Screen

For checking the settings related to video output.

LCD/VF Screen

For checking information related to the contents

displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder

screens.

Planning Metadata Screen

For checking the current planning metadata

setting.

Status Screen 167

Network Screen

For checking the network login information.

Connection Setup Screen

For checking the network connection information.

Streaming Screen

For viewing information related to live streaming.

168 Status Screen

Memo :

Marker and Safety Zone

Displays (Camera Mode

Only)

You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center

mark displays using [LCD/VF] B [Marker

Settings] B [Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and

[Center Mark].

(A P128 [ Safety Zone ] )

The marker and safety zone displays are useful in

helping you determine the angle of view for the

image according to the shooting purpose.

The marker is displayed only in the Camera mode.

Color Bar Output

Displaying the Grid Marker

Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.

Memo :

The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output

simultaneously with the color bar output.

(A P133 [ Test Tone ] )

Set [LCD/VF] B [Marker Settings] B [Grid

Marker] to “On”.

(A P127 [ Grid Marker ] )

A grid that divides the screen into 3x3 is

displayed.

To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu

To output color bars, follow the setting procedure

below.

Set [Camera Function] B [Bars] to “On”.

(A P111 [ Bars ] )

Color bars are output.

To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button

Memo :

When [Grid Marker] is set to “On”, [Aspect

Ratio], [Aspect Marker], and [Safety Zone] do

not function.

Assign the “Bars” function to any of the

user buttons.

(A P118 [ Color Space ] )

Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,

[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center

Mark] = “On”

Press the user button that is assigned with

“Bars”.

Color bars are output.

Safety Zone

Center Mark

Aspect Marker

Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode Only) 169

HLG and J-Log1 Gamma

Adjusting the Gamma

The gamma curve can be adjusted to various

characteristics when Color Space is set to a value

other than “HLG” and “J-Log1”.

(A P118 [ Gamma ] )

The gamma switches automatically to the

respective “HLG Gamma” and “J-Log1 Gamma”

when [Color Space] is set to “HLG” or “J-Log1”.

The HLG Gamma becomes an ITU2100 HLG HDR

gamma. Output signals above 100 IRE can be

clipped by adjusting “White Clip”.

The J-Log1 Gamma becomes a Log gamma with

dynamic range of max 800%.

Standard

Standard gamma curve based on

video standard.

The adjustable level is 0.35 to 0.45

to 0.55 in steps of 0.02.

120

100

When the level is at 0.45, the

gamma curve becomes one that

conforms to the ITU709 standard.

Sets to a cinema-like gamma

curve.

J-Log1

HLG

Cinema 1

Cinema 2

STANDARD0.45

+KNEE 95%

J-Log1

ITU709+KNEE

The level can be adjusted

extensively from -5 to 0 to +5.

Sets to a gamma curve with soft

expression giving priority to high

luminance gradation.

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

INPUT (%)

The level can be adjusted

extensively from -5 to 0 to +5.

Gamma Variation

The typical characteristics are shown in the

following figure. The figure shows the

characteristics when “Standard”, “Cinema 1” or

“Cinema 2” is configured and [Knee Level] is set to

“95%” for the “Standard” or “Cinema 1” graph.

120

Cinema1

STANDARD

0.45

100

Cinema2

-5

Cinema2

STANDARD 0.45

Cinema2

Cinema2 NORMAL

Cinema1

Cinema2 -5

Cinema2 +5

Cinema1 NORMAL

Cinema1 -5

Cinema1

-5

Cinema1 +5

100

200

SCEAN(%)

300

400

170 Adjusting the Gamma

Adjusting Color Matrix

Adjust Saturation.

Press the cross-shaped button (I) to move

the cursor to Saturation.

The color matrix of the camera recorder can be

adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.

When shooting is performed using multiple

cameras, the colors of the different cameras can

be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference

can be set on this camera recorder.

Each of the colors changes in the direction

indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.

Pressing the cross-shaped button (J) moves

the color outward from the center of the circle

on the vector scope.

Pressing the cross-shaped button (K) moves

the color toward to the center of the circle on

the vector scope.

The Saturation and Hue of the three colors (red,

green and blue) can be configured individually.

Adjust the color on the vector scope and

waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.

Red

The adjusted values of “Natural”, “Standard”,

“Cinema Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in

[Color Matrix] can be stored individually.

(A P122 [ Color Matrix ] )

Select [Camera Process] B [Color Matrix]/

[Adjust].

Blue

(A P122 [ Color Matrix ] )

Adjust Hue.

Select the color using the cross-shaped

button (JK) and confirm using the cross-

shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to

Hue.)

Green

Pressing the cross-shaped button (J)

rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on

the vector scope.

Pressing the cross-shaped button (K)

rotates the hue in the anti-clockwise direction

on the vector scope.

Red

Blue

Green

Adjusting Color Matrix 171

Number of Storable Setup Files

Configuring Setup Files

Camera recorder

SD slot A

SD slot B

[CAM1] to [CAM4]

[ W 1 ] to [ W 8 ]

[ Y 1 ] to [ Y 8 ]

The menu settings can be stored on the camera

recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup

file.

Compatibility

Loading a saved setup file enables you to

reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.

The following types of setup files are available.

User File/All File

Only User File/All File of the GY-HC550 and

GY-HC500 series can be loaded.

When User File/All File saved using GY-

HC550 are loaded using GY-HC500, the

functions that only exist on GY-HC550 are

ignored.

Picture File:

File that contains image creation settings in

accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera

Process] menu items).

All File:

Picture File

File that contains all menu settings, ranging from

video format settings to image creation settings

such as device settings and shooting

conditions, as well as the contents of the

[Favorites Menu]. Settings in Network Settings

are not saved.

Only Picture File of the GY-HC550 and GY-

HC500 series can be loaded.

User File:

File that contains settings from All File that are

not included in the [Camera Process] menu

items.

(A P118 [Camera Process Menu] )

Memo :

Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or

load a setup file.

The following operations can be performed on

the [Setup File] menu.

[Saving Setup Files] (A P 173)

[Loading a Setup File] (A P 174)

[Deleting Setup Files] (A P 174)

Even when [Record Format] B [System] is

configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”, setup files will be

saved to this camera recorder or the SD card.

172 Configuring Setup Files

Saving Setup Files

Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).

Display the [Setup File] menu.

Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the

Set button (R).

(A P147 [ Setup File ] )

Select [Store File] and press the Set button

(R).

Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],

and press the Set button (R).

The existing files are displayed.

Select the file to be newly saved (or

overwritten) using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

Save the file.

A confirmation screen appears when you

choose to overwrite.

Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation

screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving

starts, and“Storing...” appears on the screen.

Overwrite Picture File?

:SUNSET

Overwrite

Cancel

Memo :

Files cannot be written in the following cases.

(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)

Load Picture File

When the inserted SD card is not supported or

not formatted. (File name appears as “---”.)

Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the

screen when the file is newly saved.

When a write-protected SD card is inserted

(a z mark appears beside the SD card icon).

Name the file.

Enter the subname using the software

keyboard.

(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )

You can enter up to 8 characters for the

[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.

Memo :

When overwriting an existing file, the subname

of the existing file is displayed.

Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or

press the [CANCEL] button to return to the

previous screen.

Saving is complete.

After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen, and the menu screen

closes automatically.

Configuring Setup Files 173

Loading a Setup File

Deleting Setup Files

Display the [Setup File] menu.

Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the

Set button (R).

Display the [Setup File] menu.

Select [System] B [Setup File] and press the

Set button (R).

(A P147 [ Setup File ] )

Select [Load File] and press the Set button

Select [Delete File] and press the Set button

(R).

Select [Picture File], [User File] or [All File],

and press the Set button (R).

The existing files are displayed.

Select the file to load using the cross-

shaped button (JK), and press the Set

button (R).

Select the file to delete using the cross-

shaped button (JK), and press the Set

button (R).

Delete Picture File

CAM1

CAM2

Memo :

When the write-protect switch of the inserted SD

card is set, a z mark appears beside the SD

card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD

card even if the write-protect switch is set.

Setup files that are completely incompatible will

not be displayed.

Memo :

Setup File saved on the SD card cannot be

deleted.

Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,

and press the Set button (R).

Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the

screen.

(A P172 [Configuring Setup Files] )

Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,

and press the Set button (R).

Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the

screen.

Delete Picture File?

CAM1 :SUNSET

Delete

Cancel

Deletion is complete.

After file deletion is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen.

Reading is complete.

After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen, and the menu screen

closes automatically.

174 Configuring Setup Files

Connecting External

Monitor

To output live or playback video images and

audio sound to an external monitor, select the

output signals from the camera recorder, and

connect using an appropriate cable according to

the monitor to be used.

Choose the most suitable terminal according to

the monitor in use.

[SDI OUT] terminal:

Outputs either the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI signal or SD-

SDI signal.

[HDMI] terminal:

Outputs HDMI signals.

Memo :

If the [SDI OUT] terminal or [HDMI] terminal is

connected, configure the settings in the [A/V

Set] menu according to the monitor to be

connected.

SDI IN

HDMI

(A P130 [ SDI OUT ] )

(A P131 [ HDMI OUT ] )

To connect the output signal in the 4K(2160p)

setting, use a Premium High Speed HDMI cable

(supports 18Gbps).

When connecting in the 4K(2160p) 59.94p or

50p setting, it is recommended that the cable

used does not exceed 2 m.

Select the output signal in [A/V Set] B [SDI

OUT]/[HDMI OUT].

(A P130 [ SDI OUT ] )

(A P131 [ HDMI OUT ] )

When [Record Format]

[System] is set to “SD”,

only SD-SDI signals are output.

(A P149 [ System ] )

To display the menu screen or display screen on

the external monitor, set [A/V Set] B [Video

Set] B [SDI OUT] B [Character] to “On”.

(A P130 [ Character ] )

Connecting via SDI

Digital video signals, together with embedded

(superimposed) audio signals and time code

signals, are output for both the 3G-SDI/HD-SDI

and SD-SDI signals.

Memo :

The sampling frequency for embedded

(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time

code of the built-in time generator as well as

playback time code are also output.

Connecting External Monitor 175

Connect the headphone.

Connecting Wired Remote

Control

Audio output from the [x] terminal can be

selected using the [A/V Set] B [Monitor] item or

the [MONITOR] selection switch on the camera

recorder.

You can operate the functions of this unit with a

wired remote control.

Memo :

(A P134 [ Monitor ] )

When the switches of the camera recorder and

remote control unit are operated at the same

time, the switch operation of the remote control

unit takes priority over that of the camera

recorder.

The different combinations of settings that are

output from the [x] terminal and monitor

speaker are as follows.

[x]

[MONITOR]

Selection

[Monitor]

Setting

Terminal

Speaker *

CH1

Switch Setting

[CH1]

Connect a wired remote control to the

camera recorder.

[Mix]

[Stereo]

CH1

[BOTH]

CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2

CH1 CH2

Connect the wired remote control (sold

separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this

camera recorder.

[CH2]

CH2

Audio is output from the speaker only in Media

mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.

Connect the wired

remote control

REMOTE

Caution :

Turn off the power of the camera recorder when

connecting a wired remote control.

Turn on the power of the camera recorder.

Memo :

If both CH1 and CH2 are set to built-in

microphone and the [MONITOR] selection

switch has been set to “BOTH”, stereo sound is

output from the [x] terminal regardless of the

[Monitor] setting.

176 Connect the headphone.

List of Functions

Importing Metadata

Functions of Network

Connection

The network feature comprises web-browser-

based functions using devices such as a

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, as well as FTP

and live streaming functions that run via thumbnail

screens and menu operation.

You can download a metadata settings file (XML

format) from the FTP server and store metadata in

the camera recorder.

(A P180 [Importing Metadata] )

Uploading Recorded Clips

Memo :

Clips recorded to a recording media can be

uploaded to a preconfigured FTP server.

(A P182 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )

When [System] B [Record Set] B [Record

Format] B [System] is set to “High-Speed”, only

“Planning Metadata” can be used for the [LAN]

terminal connection.

Memo :

Uploading can also be performed via a web

browser.

(A P190 [Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web

Browser] )

Connecting to the Network

[LAN] Terminal

Built-in Wireless LAN A

Connect the following adapters to the [HOST]

terminal (USB)

Editing Metadata

Planning Metadata

You can access the page for editing the camera

recorder’s metadata via a web browser on

devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,

or PC, and edit the metadata that is to be applied

to clips to be recorded.

Wireless LAN adapter

Ethernet adapter

Cellular adapter

(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network

Connection] )

(A P187 [ Planning Metadata ] )

Clip Metadata

You can access the page for editing the

metadata via a web browser on devices such as

a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and

display or rewrite the metadata that is recorded

to a clip.

(A P188 [ Clip Metadata ] )

View Remote

You can access via a web browser on devices such

as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check

the live image or remotely control the camera.

Memo :

This feature is available when [System] is

configured to “HD” or “SD”.

Camera Control

You can access via a web browser on devices such

as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to remotely

control the camera.

(A P204 [Performing Live Streaming] )

Functions of Network Connection 177

Live streaming

Preparing Network

Connection

By combining with the decoder or PC application

that supports live streaming, you can perform audio

and video streaming via the network.

Operating Environment

Memo :

Operation has been verified for the following

This feature is available when [System] is

configured to “HD” or “SD”.

environments.

Computer

OS: Windows 7

Web browser: Internet Explorer 11

OS: Windows 10

Broadcast Overlay A L

Web browser: Chrome

OS: macOS 10.14

Texts, images and watermark can be overlaid onto

recorded video and live stream video. In addition,

changes such as changing the image are possible

with the SDP Generator app.

Web browser: Safari 12

Smartphone/Tablet Terminal

OS: iOS11 (iPhone X/iPad Pro)

Web browser: Safari 11

OS: Android 8

Scoreboard Overlay L

Web browser: Chrome

A scoreboard can be overlaid onto a recorded or

live streaming video. In addition, changes such as

changing the image are possible with the “SDP

Generator” app.

Camera Setup for Network Connection

Connect using the corresponding method

of connection

Sports Coaching L

This camera recorder supports the tagging feature,

which enables information such as the camera

angle and actions of an athlete to be recorded in

real time as metadata during sports photography

or videography.

[LAN] Terminal

Connect a PC to this camera recorder directly

using a cross-over cable or via devices such

as an Ethernet hub using a LAN cable.

(A P179 [Wired LAN connection (“LAN” or

“USB”-“Ethernet”)] )

Built-in Wireless LAN A

Attach the wireless LAN antenna if it is not

mounted.

(A P34 [Attaching the Wireless LAN

Antennas (Supplied) A ] )

(A P179 [Wireless LAN connection

(“Internal Wireless LAN”A or “USB”-

“Wireless LAN”)] )

Connect the following adapters to the

[HOST] terminal (USB)

Wireless LAN adapter

Ethernet adapter

Cellular adapter

(A P180 [Cellular adapter connection

(“USB”-“Cellular”)] )

Memo :

Only a network connection adapter can be

connected to the [HOST] terminal (USB).

Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you

have turned off the power of the camera

recorder.

You can find the latest information on the

compatible adapters at the product page of our

website.

Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)

are available for each application.

178 Functions of Network Connection

Connecting to the

Network

WirelessLANconnection(“InternalWireless

LAN”A or “USB”-“Wireless LAN”)

When “Connect with Access Point” or “P2P”-

“WPS” is selected on the [Select Connection

Type] screen.

Select the interface in the [Wizard].

Configure the settings as follows according to

the screen.

Select “LAN”, “USB” or “Internal Wireless

LAN”A in [Network] B [Connection

Setup] B [Wizard].

Mode of connection

Configuration method

When “USB” is selected, the adapter that is

connected to the [HOST] terminal (USB) is

recognized and displayed.

When “P2P”-“Manual” is selected on the

[Select Connection Type] screen.

Configure the settings as follows according to

the screen.

Configure the settings according to the

selected interface.

Mode of connection

Wired LAN connection (“LAN” or “USB”-

Configuration method

“Ethernet”)

Configure the settings as follows according to

the screen.

IP address setting (DHCP or manual)

IP Address

Subnet mask

Default gateway

DNS Server

Memo :

When an address is manually assigned in a NAT

environment, it is also necessary to set the

default gateway correctly besides conversion of

the address at the router’s end in order to

perform operations such as access to the

Internet from an external network via the router.

For “P2P”-“Manual” connections, it is necessary

to configure the [Passphrase] according to the

steps below after the above settings are

configured.

Set the camera recorder to the Camera

mode, and display [Connection Setup]

(status screen).

Press the [STATUS] button on the

camera recorder to display the status

screen.

Press the cross-shaped button (H I) to

display [Connection Setup].

Check to ensure that the [SSID] and

[Passphrase] that you have set in the

wizard are displayed.

Connecting to the Network 179

Importing Metadata

Select [SSID] from the list of access points

(smartphone, tablet terminal, PC, etc.),

and enter [Passphrase].

You can download a metadata settings file (XML

format) from the FTP server and store metadata in

the camera recorder.

Display the list of access points in the

wireless connection settings of the

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and

select “HC550-****”A and [HC500-

****]B. (**** are numbers that vary with

the device used.)

The imported metadata is applied to clips to be

recorded.

Preparing Metadata

You can record the four metadata types below.

After the password confirmation screen

appears, enter the [Passphrase]

displayed on the [Connection Setup]

screen.

Title1

ASCII only, max. 63 characters

(bytes)

Title2

UNICODE, max. 127 bytes

UNICODE, max. 2047 bytes

Creator

Description

Metadata makes use of the XML description

format.

Edit the

<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag

element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the

frames below)

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2015-01-29T18:06:21+09:00"

xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"

xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">

<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>

<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>

<Description>Description sample</Description>

<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>

Cellular adapter connection (“USB”-

“Cellular”)

Configure the settings as follows according to

the screen.

Connection phone number

Username

Password

Caution :

</MetaData>

</NRT-MetaInterface>

You can access the web functions via a web

browser on devices such as a smartphone,

tablet terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.

Note that you may have to pay very high bills in

the case of pay-per-use contracts. Fixed price

contract is recommended if you are using the

network function.

Note that the use of improper settings may result

in expensive bills from the phone service

provider. Make sure that the setting is correct.

To avoid expensive bills due to the roaming

connection, you are recommended to use this

function by disabling the roaming contract.

There may be communication even when you

are not using the network function. Remove the

cellular adapter when the function is not in use.

Setting is complete.

After setting is complete, you can access the

camera recorder via a web browser.

(A P142 [Metadata Server Item] )

180 Connecting to the Network

Configuring the Server for Downloading

Importing Metadata

For specifying the settings for connecting to the

FTP server for downloading the metadata (domain

name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the

path of the file to download.

Download the metadata settings file (XML format)

from the FTP server.

Select [Network] B [Import Metadata] and

press the Set button (R).

Open the [Metadata Server] screen.

Open the [Network] B [Metadata Server]

screen.

The [Import Metadata] screen appears.

Import Metadata

Metadata Server

Meta-FTP1...

Meta-FTP2...

Meta-FTP3...

Meta-FTP4...

Select the server for importing the

metadata.

The name that is registered in [Metadata

Server] B [Alias] is displayed.

Select a server using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

The server settings screen appears. Perform

setting for each item.

Select a server using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

Import Metadata

Up to 4 settings can be registered.

Metadata Server Set

Alias

Protocol

Server

Port

File Path

Username

Memo :

For details on the registered information, please

consult the network administrator for the server.

Importing Metadata 181

Select [Import] on the confirmation screen,

and press the Set button (R).

Import starts.

Uploading a Recorded

Video Clip

After import is complete, the display is restored

to the screen before the [Import Metadata]

screen appears.

The following are steps to upload clips recorded in

a recording media to a preset FTP server.

Configuring the FTP Server for

Uploading

For specifying the settings for connecting to the

FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain

name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the

directory of the upload destination.

Import Metadata?

Import

Cancel

Open the [Clip Server] screen.

Open the [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Clip

Server] screen.

(A P232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )

Clip Server

Importing...

Memo :

You cannot exit the menu or perform recording

while import is in progress.

If import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is

displayed, and a message indicating the cause

of the error appears.

the recording media to.

Up to 4 servers can be registered.

Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import

Memo :

Metadata] screen in step 1.

For details on the registered information, please

When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP

Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,

connections to the servers other than “FTP”

protocol cannot be made.

consult the network administrator for the server.

If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for

[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the

communication path, a screen appears

prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the

public key and certificate received from the

server.

Check to ensure that the displayed value

coincides with the known value.

182 Importing Metadata

Uploading Clips Automatically (Auto

FTP)

The following are steps to automatically upload

clips recorded in a recording media to a preset FTP

server.

Uploading Clips Manually (Manual FTP)

The following are steps to upload clips recorded in

a recording media to a preset FTP server.

All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be

uploaded.

Configure the FTP server for manual

uploading

Configure the settings for automatic

upload

Set [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]

to “Manual”.

Configure [Network] B [Upload Settings] B

[Upload] to “Auto” and configure the settings for

each of [Slot], [Cellular] and [Server].

(A P142 [ Upload ] )

Open the [Network] B [Upload Settings] B

[Clip Server] screen.

in the recording media to.

Up to 4 servers can be registered.

(A P97 [Thumbnail Screen] )

Memo :

For details on the registered information, please

consult the network administrator for the server.

When [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Upload]

is configured to “Auto”, manual uploading is also

disabled for slots other than the selected “Slot”.

To perform manual uploading, select “Manual”.

FTP transfer is disabled when [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is

configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP

transfer, select a setting other than “High-

Speed”.

Start uploading

Configuring [Network] B [Upload Settings] B

[Auto Upload] to “On” starts uploading.

You can also press the user button that is

assigned with “Auto Upload”.

Memo :

FTP transfer is performed for the slot configured

in [Slot].

If recording is started for the same slot as the

one configured in [Slot] while FTP transfer is in

progress, FTP transfer will be interrupted.

FTP transfer is not performed while live

streaming or Return over IP is in progress.

FTP transfer is disabled when [System] B

[Record Set] B [Record Format] B [System] is

configured to “High-Speed”. To perform FTP

transfer, select a setting other than “High-

Speed”.

Uploading a Video Clip

Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.

Press and hold the [MODE] selection button

in the Camera mode to enter the Media

mode. A thumbnail screen of the clips

recorded on the recording media is

displayed.

You can upload the selected clips on the

thumbnail screen to the FTP server.

Uploading a Recorded Video Clip 183

Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.

Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using

the cross-shaped button (JKH I).

Upload is complete.

After upload is complete, “Successfully

Completed.” appears on the screen.

Press the Set button (R) to return to the

thumbnail screen.

FTP Upload

Successfully Completed.

Exit

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

The action selection screen is displayed.

Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips

To select and upload multiple clips, refer to

“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple

Clips] (A P 104)”.

This Clip

Selected Clips

All Clips

Uploading All Video Clips

Press the [ONLINE/3] button.

The action selection screen is displayed.

Select [FTP Upload] B [This Clip] B server

to upload to, and press the Set button (R).

The status of the transfer process is indicated

by a progress bar.

Upload the clips.

Select [FTP Upload...] B [All Clips] B server to

upload to, and press the Set button (R).

FTP Upload

This Clip

Selected Clips

All Clips

Stop

Upload in Background

Upload starts.

Memo :

The status of the transfer process is indicated

by a progress bar.

The name for the server to upload files to are

indicated using the preset names in [Clip

Server] B [Alias].

FTP Upload

To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).

Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and

press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and

return to the thumbnail screen.

Stop

Upload in Background

184 Uploading a Recorded Video Clip

Upload is complete.

Memo :

After all clips are uploaded successfully,

“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.

Press the Set button (R) to return to the

thumbnail screen.

To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).

Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and

press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and

return to the thumbnail screen.

When clips are not uploaded successfully,

the following errors are displayed.

If the file to be uploaded has the same name as

an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite

confirmation window appears.

FTP Upload

When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP

Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,

the overwrite confirmation window will not be

displayed and the existing file is overwritten.

Even after upload has started (FTP transfer in

progress) in step 3, pressing the [MODE] button

switches the camera recorder to the Camera

mode, allowing you to start shooting.

If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for

[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the

communication path, a screen appears

prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the

public key and certificate received from the

server.

Failed.

Internal Error.

Exit

Cause of

Error

(A P232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )

Memo :

If a notification such as a an error message

appears after shifting to the Camera mode while

FTP transfer is in progress, a 5 icon (yellow) will

appear in the media’s remaining level display

area in the Camera mode.

Check to ensure that the displayed value

coincides with the known value.

You can press the [MODE] button to switch to

the Media mode and display the above error

screen.

Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with

each public key and certificate.

For details of the fingerprint, please consult

Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors] (A P 232)”

to clear the error message.

the administrator of the server to be

connected.

(A P178 [Camera Setup for Network

When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP

Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,

connections to the servers other than “FTP”

protocol cannot be made.

Uploading a Recorded Video Clip 185

FTP Resume Feature

Connecting from a Web

Browser

When FTP transfer starts and there is a file of the

same name on the server with a file size smaller

than the file to be transferred, the file on the server

will be regarded as an interrupted file during a FTP

transfer. A confirmation screen to resume transfer

(append writing) appears.

You can access the web functions of this camera

recorder via a web browser on devices such as a

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

Make the necessary preparations for connection in

advance.

Connection] )

Set the camera recorder to the Camera

mode, and display [Connection Setup]

(status screen).

Press the [STATUS] button on the camera

recorder to display the status screen. Press

the cross-shaped button (HI) to display the

[Connection Setup] screen.

Check the displayed [IP Address].

If “Resume” is selected, FTP transfer is carried out

Start up the web browser on the terminal

you wish to connect to the camera

recorder, and enter the [IP Address] in the

address field.

such that it appends from the position where it was

interrupted.

When FTP transfer ends normally, “Complete”

appears on the screen.

(Example: 192.168.0.10)

Memo :

If “192.168.0.10” is displayed in [IP Address],

enter “http://192.168.0.10”.

FTP server equipped with resume function is

required.

If [Network] B [Upload Settings] B [Clip

Server] B [Clip-FTP1/2/3/4] B [Protocol] is set

to “SFTP”, the resume function is disabled.

If “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP Proxy]

screen of the network connection setting, the

resume function is disabled.

http://192.168.0.10

Enter the user name and password.

Enter the user name and the password on the

camera.

Check the [Web Username] and [Web

Password] in the [Network] screen (status

screen).

Memo :

The user name and password can be changed

in [Network] B [Web] B [Username] and

[Password].

(A P141 [ Username ] )

(A P141 [ Password ] )

186 FTP Resume Feature

Editing Metadata

You can create the metadata to be inserted into a

recorded file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded

clip.

Edit the metadata.

Enter information for the necessary fields.

After input is complete, tap (click) [Save] to

overwrite the metadata.

Planning Metadata

You can access the page for editing the camera

recorder’s metadata via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and

edit the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be

recorded.

Access the main page of the camera.

Access the page via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.

After update is complete, “Renewal of

planning metadata is succeeded.” is

displayed. Tap (click) [OK].

Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to

open the [Planning Metadata] screen.

Returns to the screen in step 3.

Renewal of planning metadata is

succeeded.

Memo :

If update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata

is failed.” is displayed.

Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step

Editing Metadata 187

Clip Metadata

Switching from a web browser

You can access the page for editing the metadata

You will see a message indicating “It is

necessary to change the camera mode to

"Remote Edit Mode". Change the mode.”

on the web browser.

via a web browser on devices such as a

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and display or

rewrite the metadata that is recorded to a clip.

Access the main page of the camera.

Access the page via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

(A P182 [Configuring the FTP Server for

It is necessary to change the camera

mode to "Remote Edit Mode".

Change the mode.

Display the clip list.

Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip

list.

Cancel

Change

Tap (click) [Change] to switch the camera

to the Remote Edit mode.

Remote Edit Mode

Exit

Switching from the camera

“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is

displayed on the display screen of the

camera unit.

Select [Change] and press the Set button

(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.

Set the camera recorder to the “Remote

Edit Mode”.

Change to

You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a

web browser or through operation of the

camera.

Remote Edit Mode?

Change

Cancel

Remote Edit Mode

Exit

188 Editing Metadata

Edit the metadata of the selected clips.

Edit the information for the necessary fields.

Memo :

When the menu or status is displayed, display

of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.

If the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,

close the menu.

If you are using a PC, input using the mouse

and keyboard.

If you are using a smartphone or tablet

terminal, tap the text input area to display a

standard software keyboard on the screen.

Enter the information using the displayed

keyboard.

If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,

close the status display.

Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera

recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends

the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to

the Camera mode.

You can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark

to or delete it from selected clips.

After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to

overwrite the metadata.

When FTP upload via the camera unit is

currently in progress, switching to the Remote

Edit mode is disabled.

Select the Metadata Edit mode.

A B

Select the [Metadata] tab.

Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.

A list of the recorded clips appears on the

[Clip List] screen.

Tap (click) the clip for which you want to

rewrite the metadata.

Memo :

You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot

A] and [Slot B] tabs. The [Slot EXT] tab appears

when [System] is configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”.

You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to

the previous or next 30 clips on the list.

Editing Metadata 189

Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.

Uploading a Recording

Clip via a Web Browser

Update of the metadata starts.

After update is complete, “Renewal of clip

metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap

(click) [OK].

The following are steps to upload clips recorded

in a recording media to a preset FTP server.

You can upload selected clips, all clips, or those

appended with an OK mark.

Returns to the screen in step 4.

Renewal of clip metadata is

succeeded.

Configuring the FTP Server for

Uploading

Uploading] )

Uploading Video Clips

Access the main page of the camera.

Access the page via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

(A P232 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )

Memo :

If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is

failed.” is displayed.

Display the clip list.

Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step

Tap (click) the [Clip List] tab to display the clip

list.

Set the camera recorder to the “Remote

Edit Mode”.

You can switch to “Remote Edit Mode” from a

web browser or through operation of the

camera.

190 Editing Metadata

Switching from a web browser

Memo :

You will see a message indicating “It is

When the menu or status is displayed,

display of the confirmation screen will

be put on hold.

necessary to change the camera mode

to "Remote Edit Mode". Change the

mode.” on the web browser.

If the menu is displayed on the camera

recorder, close the menu.

If the status is displayed on the camera

recorder, close the status display.

Pressing the Set button (R) on the

camera recorder while in the Remote

Edit Mode ends the Remote Edit Mode

forcibly and switches to the Camera

mode.

It is necessary to change the camera

mode to "Remote Edit Mode".

Change the mode.

Cancel

Change

When FTP upload via the camera unit

is currently in progress, switching to the

Remote Edit mode is disabled.

Tap (click) [Change] to switch the

camera to the Remote Edit mode.

Select the Upload mode.

Select the [Upload] tab.

Select the clip you want to upload.

Remote Edit Mode

Exit

A list of the recorded clips appears on the

[Clip List] screen.

Tap (click) the clip you want to upload to

select it.

Switching from the camera

Clips being selected are indicated by a check

mark.

“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” is

displayed on the display screen of the

Memo :

camera unit.

You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot

A] and [Slot B] tabs. The [Slot EXT] tab appears

when [System] is configured to “4K EXT (SSD)”.

You can use the [J-30] or [K+30] tab to jump to

the previous or next 30 clips on the list.

Select [Change] and press the Set button

(R) to switch to the Remote Edit mode.

Change to

Select the upload operation.

Remote Edit Mode?

Tap (click) the [Actions] button.

Change

Cancel

Remote Edit Mode

Exit

Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser 191

Select a method to upload the clips.

Select the clip server and start uploading.

Upon selecting the server to upoload clips to,

an upload screen appears.

Upload all clips

Uploads all the clips in the displayed slots.

Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]

screen.

The status of the transfer process is indicated

by a progress bar.

Upload OK clips

Uploads all clips in the displayed slots that

are appended with an OK mark.

Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]

screen.

Upload selected clips

Uploads the clips you have selected.

Tap (click) to move to the [Clip Server]

screen.

Clear all selection

Clears all clip selection and returns to the

[Clip List] screen.

192 Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser

Upload is complete.

Memo :

After upload is complete, “Successfully

Completed.” appears on the screen.

To stop transfer, tap (click) the [Stop] button.

Tapping (clicking) [Yes] on the confirmation

screen stops the transfer halfway and brings you

back to the main page.

FTP Upload

If there already exists a file on the FTP server

with a name identical to the file to be transferred,

a confirmation screen asking to overwrite the file

will appear.

Successfully Completed.

However, if “HTTP” is selected in the [Select

FTP Proxy] screen of the network connection

settings, an overwrite confirmation screen does

not appear, and the existing file will be

overwritten directly.

After uploading in step 8 has started, other web

browser operations are disabled until uploading

is complete.

Exit

When clips are not uploaded successfully,

the following errors are displayed.

FTP Upload

After uploading in step 8 has started and upon

shifting to the Media mode by pressing the

[[MODE] selection button, operation from the

web browser will be disabled.

Failed.

Internal Error.

Exit

Cause of

Error

To enable web browser operation, press the

[[MODE] selection button again to switch to the

Camera mode.

If a setting other than “FTP” is specified for

[Protocol], to ensure the safety of the

communication path, a screen appears

prompting you to validate the fingerprint of the

public key and certificate received from the

server.

Memo :

Follow “[List of FTP Transfer Errors] (A P 232)”

to clear the error message.

Check to ensure that the displayed value

coincides with the known value.

Fingerprint is a unique value that varies with

each public key and certificate.

For details of the fingerprint, please consult

the administrator of the server to be

connected.

When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP

Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,

connections to the servers other than “FTP”

protocol cannot be made.

Uploading a Recording Clip via a Web Browser 193

Page Switch Tab

View Remote Feature

Tap (click) this tab to move to the [Planning

Metadata], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]

screen.

You can access via a web browser on devices such

as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check

the live image and perform the following remote

control operations.

Live View Screen

Displays the live images.

Tap a live image to display or hide information

that is displayed on the live image, such as

remaining space on the media and time code.

Start/stop recording

Zooming

[Clear] Button

Access the main page of the camera.

Access the page via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

(A P195 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )

Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position

mode.

(A P196 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )

Tap (click) the [View Remote] tab to open

the [View Remote] screen.

[Preset] Button

Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position

mode.

(A P195 [Registering Preset Zoom] )

Zoom Control

Operate the zoom function by dragging the

zoom button along the sliding bar.

Tap (click) the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine-

tune the zoom position.

The slide changes according to the dynamic

zoom.

(A P113 [ Dynamic Zoom ] )

Dynamic Zoom Off:

Dynamic Zoom On:

Start Record Button

Stop Record Button

Operating Procedure

[A]/[B]/[C] Buttons

Use these buttons to perform preset registration

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

or delete a preset data.

Function Lock Button

Locks the functions that have been set on the

[Settings] screen.

268min

230min

---min

STBY

(A P199 [Changing View Remote Function

Settings] )

282min

Icon

Description

Locked

Not locked

Camera Control Function

(A P59 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom

194 View Remote Feature

Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom

In the same way, register [B] and [C].

After all three positions A, B and C are

registered, the positions of the [A], [B], and [C]

buttons will be rearranged according to the

order of the registered zoom position from the

left.

Registering Preset Zoom

You can register any 3 zoom positions.

Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.

Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

268min

230min

---min

STBY

268min

282min

230min

---min

STBY

282min

Exit the Register Preset Zoom mode.

Tap (click) the [Preset] button to exit the

Determine the zoom position.

Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and

determine a position.

Tap (click) [A].

Position [A] is registered, and position A is

displayed on the sliding bar of the zoom control.

Memo :

After registration is complete ([A], [B], and [C]

buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each

button switches to the corresponding preset

zoom position.

This function operates independently of the

preset zoom position on the camera recorder.

Position (Preset Zoom)] )

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

When the dynamic zoom is on, the preset button

where the dynamic zoom position is registered

grays out when the dynamic zoom is off and the

zoom position cannot be changed.

268min

230min

---min

STBY

282min

When the dynamic zoom is off, the dynamic

zoom position cannot be registered.

View Remote Feature 195

Deleting a Preset Zoom

Camera Control Function

Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.

When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are

registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear] button

switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.

You can control the camera by accessing via a web

browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet

terminal, or PC.

You can perform the following operations for each

of the items.

The image is displayed on the View remote.

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

268min

230min

---min

STBY

282min

Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that

corresponds to the position you want to

delete.

REC

For performing recording start or recording

pause operation.

The position is deleted, and the button is

grayed out.

The corresponding zoom position mark on

the sliding bar also disappears.

STREAMING

Turns on or off live streaming.

Cam1

01:12::54.19

Z 00

268min

230min

---min

STBY

282min

Grayed out

Position mark

disappears

Exit the Delete Preset Zoom mode.

Tap (click) the [Clear] button to exit the Delete

Preset Zoom mode.

Memo :

The Clip Review function of the camera recorder

is unavailable during View Remote operation.

(A P86 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately

(Clip Review)] )

196 View Remote Feature

CAMERA

ZOOM

Enables operations related to the camera

functions.

Enables zooming operations.

FOCUS

Enables focusing operations.

USER SWITCH

You can enable or disable the user buttons that

are assigned with a function.

You can show or hide the display and menu

characters on an external monitor as well as

operation of menus, switching the display

screen and status display.

Camera Control Function 197

Changing the Settings via

a Web Browser

You can change the network-related settings by

accessing via a web browser on devices such as a

smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

View Remote

Settings for operations on the View Remote.

Connection Setup

Settings related to the network.

You can change the settings for each of the

preset items on the [Wizard] screen of the

camera recorder.

Access the main page of the camera.

Access the page via a web browser on devices

such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.

(A P142 [Metadata Server Item] )

Metadata Server

Settings on the server for importing the

metadata.

Setting can be performed in the same way as

the Metadata Server menu on the camera

recorder.

Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.

The latest settings are reflected, regardless of

whether they are specified via the camera

recorder or web operation.

Clip Server

Settings for the server to upload recorded clips

to.

Setting can be performed in the same way as

the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.

The latest settings are reflected, regardless of

whether they are specified via the camera

recorder or web operation.

Live Streaming

Setting for streaming audio and video via the

network.

The latest settings are reflected, regardless of

whether they are specified via the camera

recorder or web operation.

Return over IP

For specifying settings related to Return over IP.

For configuring settings for receiving video and

audio via the network.

The [Settings] screen appears.

Set each of the items as follows.

The latest settings are reflected, regardless of

whether they are specified via the camera

recorder or web operation.

Memo :

Priority is given to menu operation on the

camera recorder.

When the menu on the camera recorder is

opened while the [Settings] screen is opened

using a web browser, a warning appears, after

which the display returns to the main screen.

While the menu is displayed on the camera

recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be

opened via the web browser.

198 Changing the Settings via a Web Browser

Changing View Remote Function

Settings

Changing Connection Setup

You can change the settings for each of the preset

items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera

recorder.

For performing setting for using the View Remote

function.

If all the items cannot be displayed in a single

page, scroll down to display the remaining

items.

Items that cannot be changed are grayed out

according to the type of adapter connected and

the mode of connection.

[Camera Name]

For setting the name that appears at the top

left of the view screen.

Tapping the text input area displays a

software keyboard.

Method of Connection

Type of USB Adapter Connected

Mode of Wireless LAN Connection

If you are using a PC, enter using the PC

keyboard.

By tapping the Go key after input is complete,

the software keyboard disappears.

[Search Access Point] Button

Tap (click) to display a list of the detected

access points.

[Restrictions]

For setting the buttons to be disabled on the

View screen while in the locked mode.

The currently selected access point is indicated

by a dot mark ( 0 ).

[REC]:

For setting whether to disable the Stop

Record button, zoom operation, and camera

control during recording.

Tap (click) each item to switch between

[Unlock] and [Lock].

[Except REC]:

For setting whether to disable the record

button, zoom operation, and camera control

in any mode other than the recording mode.

Tap (click) each item to switch between

[Unlock] and [Lock].

[Save]/[Cancel]

Tap (click) [Save] to save the settings.

Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to

the main [Settings] screen.

Settings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen of

the Camera Recorder

Changing the Settings via a Web Browser 199

Changing Metadata Server Settings

You can make direct changes to the FTP server for

importing the metadata set in [Network] B

[Metadata Server], as well as the path of the file to

import.

Changing Clip Server Settings

Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]

Screen of the Camera Recorder

When “On” is selected for “DHCP”, all items will

be grayed out.

You can make direct changes to the server and

directory settings that are specified in [Network] B

[Clip Server] for uploading recorded clips in the

recording media to the FTP server.

Changing Streaming Settings

You can make direct changes to settings that are

specified in [Network] B [Live Streaming], such as

information on the destination of distribution.

[Saving the Connection Settings File]

Settings when using cellular adapter

Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen of the

Camera Recorder

[OK]/[Cancel] Button

After changing of settings is complete, tap

(click) the [OK] button.

On the confirmation screen, tap (click)

[Execute] to change the settings on the camera

recorder and restart the network.

200 Changing the Settings via a Web Browser

Saving the Connection Settings File

Managing the Network

Connection Settings File

Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B

[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).

Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).

This camera recorder allows you to save the

network connection settings on the Wizard screen

to the camera recorder unit.

Loading a saved connecting settings file enables

you to reproduce the appropriate network

connection state speedily.

Memo :

To save or retrieve the connection settings, go

to [Network] B [Connection Setup].

The following operations can be performed on

the [Connection Setup] menu.

(A P 201)

Select the file to be newly saved (or

overwritten) using the cross-shaped

button (JK), and press the Set button (R).

[Reading the Connection Settings File]

(A P 202)

[Deleting Connection Settings] (A P 203)

Number of Storable Setup Files

Camera recorder [CAM1] to [CAM4]

Name the file.

Enter the subname using the software

keyboard.

(A P109 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )

Memo :

When overwriting an existing file, the subname

of the existing file is displayed.

Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or

press the [CANCEL] button to return to the

previous screen.

Managing the Network Connection Settings File 201

Reading the Connection Settings File

Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).

Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B

[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).

Select [Load] and press the Set button (R).

Save the file.

A confirmation screen appears when you

choose to overwrite.

Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation

screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving

starts, and“Storing...” appears on the screen.

Select the file to read using the cross-

shaped button (JK), and press the Set

button (R).

Overwrite Connection

Setup?

CAM3:KAMAKURA

Overwrite

Cancel

Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the

screen when the file is newly saved.

Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,

and press the Set button (R).

Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the

screen.

Storing...

Load Connection

Setup?

CAM2 :YOKOHAMA

Load

Cancel

Saving is complete.

After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen, and the menu screen

closes automatically.

Reading is complete.

After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen, and the menu screen

closes automatically.

202 Managing the Network Connection Settings File

Deleting Connection Settings

Select [Network] B [Connection Setup] B

[Setup File] and press the Set button (R).

Select [Delete] and press the Set button

(R).

Select the file to delete using the cross-

shaped button (JK), and press the Set

button (R).

Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,

and press the Set button (R).

Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the

screen.

Delete Connection

Setup?

CAM1 :TOKYO

Delete

Cancel

Deletion is complete.

After file deletion is complete, “Complete”

appears on the screen.

Managing the Network Connection Settings File 203

Performing Live Streaming

By combining with the decoder or PC application that supports live streaming, you can perform audio and

video streaming via the network.

Supported Formats

Usable Formats for Live Streaming

Record Format

1920x 1920x 1920x 1280x 1280x 720x

640x 640x

Frame

Rate

System Format Resolution

1080, 1080, 1080, 720, 720,

480,

60i

360,

60p

360,

30p

60p

60i

30p

60p

30p

QuickTime

(H.264)

60p

60i

1920x1080

30p

60p

60i

1280x720

1920x1080

1280x720

Exchange

(U model)

QuickTime

(MPEG2)

MXF

1920x1080

30p

60i

1440x1080

1280x720

(MPEG2)

60p

QuickTime

(H.264)

720x480

60i

(U model)

Usable Formats for Live Streaming

Record Format

System Format Resolution

1920x 1920x 1920x 1280x 1280x 720x

640x 640x

Frame

Rate

1080, 1080, 1080, 720, 720,

50p 50i 25p 50p 25p

576,

50i

360,

50p

360,

25p

QuickTime

(H.264)

50p

50i

1920x1080

25p

50p

50i

1280x720

1920x1080

1280x720

MP4

(E model)

QuickTime

(MPEG2)

MXF

1920x1080

25p

50i

1440x1080

1280x720

(MPEG2)

50p

QuickTime

(H.264)

720x576

50i

(E model)

204 Performing Live Streaming

Audio

AAC

Memo :

The distributable resolution, frame rate and bit

rate vary according to the recording format.

To distribute progressive video, set the frame

rate to any of the progressive frame rates. And

to distribute interlace video, set the frame rate to

any of the interlace frame rates.

Supported Protocols

MPEG2-TS/UDP

MPEG2-TS/TCP

MPEG2-TS/RTP

RTSP/RTP

ZIXI

Depending on the type of network adapter used

and the connection, the images and audio

sound during live streaming can be choppy.

RTMP

Performing Live Streaming 205

Setting Distribution

Set the Resolution and Frame & Bit Rate for

the video to be distributed.

Specify the settings in [Network] B [Live

Streaming].

Set the [Record Format] according to the

resolution and frame rate of the video to be

distributed.